fomc transcripts · July 26, 2016
FOMC Meeting Transcript
July 26–27, 2016
1 of 283
Meeting of the Federal Open Market Committee on
July 26–27, 2016
A joint meeting of the Federal Open Market Committee and the Board of Governors was
held in the offices of the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System in Washington, D.C.,
on Tuesday, July 26, 2016, at 10:00 a.m. and continued on Wednesday, July 27, 2016, at 9:00 a.m.
Those present were the following:
Janet L. Yellen, Chair
William C. Dudley, Vice Chairman
Lael Brainard
James Bullard
Stanley Fischer
Esther L. George
Loretta J. Mester
Jerome H. Powell
Eric Rosengren
Daniel K. Tarullo
Charles L. Evans, Patrick Harker, Robert S. Kaplan, Neel Kashkari, and Michael Strine,
Alternate Members of the Federal Open Market Committee
Jeffrey M. Lacker, Dennis P. Lockhart, and John C. Williams, Presidents of the Federal
Reserve Banks of Richmond, Atlanta, and San Francisco, respectively
Brian F. Madigan, Secretary
Matthew M. Luecke, Deputy Secretary
David W. Skidmore, Assistant Secretary
Michelle A. Smith, Assistant Secretary
Scott G. Alvarez, General Counsel
Steven B. Kamin, Economist
Thomas Laubach, Economist
David W. Wilcox, Economist
Thomas A. Connors, Troy Davig, Michael P. Leahy, David E. Lebow, Stephen A. Meyer,
Ellis W. Tallman, Christopher J. Waller, and William Wascher, Associate Economists
Simon Potter, Manager, System Open Market Account
Lorie K. Logan, Deputy Manager, System Open Market Account
Robert deV. Frierson, Secretary of the Board, Office of the Secretary, Board of
Governors
July 26–27, 2016
2 of 283
Matthew J. Eichner, 1 Director, Division of Reserve Bank Operations and Payment
Systems, Board of Governors; Michael S. Gibson, Director, Division of Banking
Supervision and Regulation, Board of Governors; Nellie Liang, Director, Division of
Financial Stability, Board of Governors
James A. Clouse, Deputy Director, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of Governors;
Daniel M. Covitz, Deputy Director, Division of Research and Statistics, Board of
Governors
Andrew Figura, David Reifschneider, and Stacey Tevlin, Special Advisers to the Board,
Office of Board Members, Board of Governors
Trevor A. Reeve, Special Adviser to the Chair, Office of Board Members, Board of
Governors
Linda Robertson, Assistant to the Board, Office of Board Members, Board of Governors
Fabio M. Natalucci and Gretchen C. Weinbach, 2 Senior Associate Directors, Division of
Monetary Affairs, Board of Governors; Michael G. Palumbo, Senior Associate Director,
Division of Research and Statistics, Board of Governors; Beth Anne Wilson, Senior
Associate Director, Division of International Finance, Board of Governors
Michael T. Kiley, Senior Adviser, Division of Research and Statistics, and Senior
Associate Director, Division of Financial Stability, Board of Governors
Antulio N. Bomfim and Joyce K. Zickler, Senior Advisers, Division of Monetary Affairs,
Board of Governors; Brian M. Doyle,3 Senior Adviser, Division of International Finance,
Board of Governors
Jane E. Ihrig,3 Associate Director, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of Governors
John J. Stevens, Deputy Associate Director, Division of Research and Statistics, Board of
Governors
Glenn Follette and Steven A. Sharpe, Assistant Directors, Division of Research and
Statistics, Board of Governors; Elizabeth Klee,3 Assistant Director, Division of Monetary
Affairs, Board of Governors
David H. Small, Project Manager, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of Governors
Elmar Mertens, Principal Economist, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of Governors
Valerie Hinojosa, Information Manager, Division of Monetary Affairs, Board of
Governors
1
2
Attended the discussions of the long-run monetary policy implementation framework and financial developments.
Attended the discussion of the long-run monetary policy implementation framework.
July 26–27, 2016
3 of 283
Marie Gooding, First Vice President, Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta
David Altig and Ron Feldman, Executive Vice Presidents, Federal Reserve Banks of
Atlanta and Minneapolis, respectively
Tobias Adrian, Michael Dotsey, Stephanie Heller, Susan McLaughlin,3 Julie Ann
Remache,3 and John A. Weinberg, Senior Vice Presidents, Federal Reserve Banks of
New York, Philadelphia, New York, New York, New York, and Richmond, respectively
John Duca, Jonas D. M. Fisher, Deborah L. Leonard,3 Antoine Martin,3 Ed Nosal,3 Anna
Paulson,3 Joe Peek, and Patricia Zobel,3 Vice Presidents, Federal Reserve Banks of
Dallas, Chicago, New York, New York, Chicago, Chicago, Boston, and New York,
respectively
John Fernald, Senior Research Advisor, Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco
July 26–27, 2016
4 of 283
Transcript of the Federal Open Market Committee Meeting on
July 26–27, 2016
July 26 Session
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay. We are all a couple of minutes early, but it looks like we’re
ready to get going. Today’s meeting, as usual, will be a joint meeting between the FOMC and
the Board of Governors. So I need a motion to close the Board meeting.
MR. FISCHER. So moved.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Okay. We’re going to begin with our first topic, “LongRun Framework for Monetary Policy Implementation,” and let me ask Simon to start us off on
this.
MR. POTTER. 1 Thank you, Madam Chair. We will be referring to the materials
titled “Long-Run Framework for Monetary Policy Implementation.”
The briefing today summarizes the work of three foundational workgroups on the
foreign experience, lessons from the crisis, and money markets that was distributed to
the Committee over the past few weeks. As you know, this is a System-wide effort
with important contributions from a number of divisions of the Board and all of the
Reserve Banks. Today, in addition to the presenters at the table—Brian Doyle, David
Altig, and Beth Klee—we have Patricia Zobel, Ed Nosal, and Susan McLaughlin
seated behind us, who were the co-leads for these presenters. They’ll also be
available to answer questions.
In slide 3 of your rather thick presentation package, you can see the key goals of
the project that were agreed to almost one year ago. These goals have obviously been
influenced by the experience of advanced-economy central banks over the past
10 years or so. The foundational workgroups were designed to put this experience
into a structure that will feed into the two framework workgroups, which are focused
on interest rate targets, operating regimes, and the balance sheet. Our current plan is
for the framework workgroups to present their findings at the November meeting.
The feedback that you will provide today and in November will inform the staff’s
work on evaluating comprehensive frameworks that will be presented to the
Committee further down the road.
The next slide shows an additional set of objectives for alternative operating
frameworks. Objective 2 on promoting efficient, effective, and resilient money
The materials used by Messrs. Potter, Doyle, and Altig and Mses. Klee and Remache are appended to this
transcript (appendix 1).
1
July 26–27, 2016
5 of 283
markets will be an important focus of the presentation today. As also noted on this
slide, the Committee’s normalization principles and plans provide an additional set of
criteria when it comes to the size and composition of the SOMA portfolio. Brian will
now present on the foreign experience.
MR. DOYLE. Thank you, Simon. To start our presentations, I’m going to talk
about monetary policy implementation elsewhere in the world. The foreign
experience workgroup, co-led by Patricia Zobel of the Federal Reserve Bank of New
York, primarily surveyed the experience of nine advanced-economy central banks.
As noted on slide 6, this survey included how central banks implemented policy
before the crisis, how the frameworks evolved since then, and some of the rationale
for those frameworks. In my limited time, I will just touch on some of the highlights
from the memorandum that was circulated earlier.
As shown in your next slide, there is one finding that is perhaps useful to state
right off the bat. We don’t see dramatic differences in most central banks’ ability to
control short-term money market rates or to transmit effects of monetary policy out to
longer-term interest rates. However, the wide variety of frameworks represents
choices that central banks have made regarding how to achieve that control. And a
better understanding of these choices may be helpful, as they reflect decisions that
these central banks made regarding tradeoffs along other dimensions.
What are the primary differences in these frameworks? First, as noted in the first
row of the table in slide 8, before the crisis, nearly all advanced-economy central
banks communicated monetary policy with an overnight interest rate. But what that
rate was varied some. A few central banks, like the Federal Reserve, used a target for
a market rate. Many others used an administered rate—that is, a rate pertaining to
some operation that they themselves set. Even in these latter cases, central banks
often made reference to a market rate. The market rates were usually unsecured rates.
Inn a couple of cases, however, they were secured rates.
As shown in your next slide, how central banks controlled money market rates
also varied. Before the crisis, most used “corridor” regimes, supplying reserves to
meet banks’ demand at the policy rate and generally using lending and deposit
facilities to create a ceiling and a floor. Within this group, most central banks had
some form of reserve requirements to foster a stable demand for reserves. A few
central banks used “floor” regimes, providing sufficient liquidity for market rates to
trade near the rate of interest that the central bank pays on deposits or reserves.
After the crisis began, how central banks implemented policy shifted.
Unconventional policies, including large-scale asset programs not only of
government, but in some cases private-sector assets; long-term funding programs,
such as those of the ECB; and, most recently, negative interest rates, in some cases
became the primary means of implementing and communicating policy. And, as
indicated by the arrows in the chart, as central banks injected more liquidity under
some of these programs, corridor systems in many instances became de facto floor
systems.
July 26–27, 2016
6 of 283
As shown on the next slide, the distinctions between corridor and floor regimes
have become blurred a little in recent years, as central banks changed how they
remunerate reserves and gave banks a wider degree of choice over how many
reserves to hold. To encourage interbank trading and reduce banks’ hoarding of
reserves, central banks using floors began to pay a lower rate on reserves above some
threshold or quota—“tiered remuneration.” This “tiering” is also similar to what has
been seen more recently with negative policy rates at the Swiss National Bank and the
Bank of Japan, albeit for a very different reason—that is, to limit the costs for banks
of holding reserves. And, before the crisis, the Bank of England implemented a
corridor regime in which banks could choose their own target for reserves—a
“voluntary reserves target”—reducing some of the costs associated with reserve
requirements.
These regimes influence the nature of activity in money markets, as highlighted
on the next slide. Systems characterized by scarce excess reserves generally feature
robust interbank trading. In floor systems that featured quotas, in conditions of stillabundant reserves, money market trading is largely between banks that are above
their quotas and banks that are below. Likewise, currently in Japan and the United
Kingdom, money market trading is largely between nonbank participants without
access to remunerated accounts and banks with access. In these economies, as shown
in the figure, money market rates trade below the rate on reserves, as is the case in the
United States (the red line). Some central banks view arbitrage activity created by
remuneration systems as meaningful and robust, while others view activity created by
reserve scarcity as providing more insight into money market conditions.
Turning the page, another observation from the foreign experience is that central
banks have added counterparties and accepted a wider range of collateral during the
crisis (or already had broad sets of both) and expect to keep those broader sets. For
some central banks, this broadening of counterparties has included nonbank entities,
including financial market utilities. The main reason for the expansion during the
crisis was a desire to provide liquidity to parts of the financial system that were “cut
off.” But some foreign central banks also see advantages in reducing competitive
distortions created by conferring counterparty status on a narrow group and in the
enhanced information that they receive about interacting with a number of
institutions. That said, central banks acknowledge that broader policy comes with
costs—increased operational costs, the potential to reduce private market activity—
and that accepting a wider set of collateral could create some moral hazard if it
encourages banks to hold riskier assets.
The next slide, slide 13, notes that a few central banks see liquidity insurance—
the readiness to provide broad-based liquidity in the case of a shock—as distinct from
either monetary policy implementation or emergency lending and have different
operations to meet those separate objectives. The Bank of England views liquidity
insurance as operations with clear criteria for use and broad access, and its scheme
allows financial institutions to obtain reserves or liquid assets for less liquid assets.
They view the clarity about the purpose of these operations as, it is hoped, reducing
stigma and clarity about when these facilities would be used as limiting contagion
July 26–27, 2016
7 of 283
during stress events. That said, although some central banks provide greater clarity
about their plans to employ such operations in stress events, others prefer some
ambiguity about the circumstances of when they would use such operations.
Turning to your next slide, foreign central banks are still considering other
features of their long-run frameworks. For example, most central banks think that
they should be ready to use unconventional policies if needed and expect to maintain
some operational preparedness. And central banks have diverse views about the
appropriate size and composition of their balance sheets in the long run. Many
central banks that have expanded their balance sheets with asset purchases in recent
years hope to return to some form of smaller balance sheet in the future. But they
also acknowledge that higher demand for reserves by banks may leave their balance
sheets larger than before the crisis. Some have also noted that exceptionally large
balance sheets can complicate relationships with fiscal authorities.
As highlighted in the final slide for this portion of the presentation, most central
banks are still learning about how they should adapt policy implementation to the
effects of new regulations. But one effect that most central banks do expect is that
demand for reserves will increase. Excess reserves qualify as high-quality liquid
assets (HQLA) under the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), and getting excess
reserves for less liquid collateral (where possible) boosts the LCR. Central banks are
split on how they should complement this effect. The Reserve Bank of Australia
introduced a facility to help banks meet this demand in some instances, in part
because Australia has a low stock of government debt. Other central banks will only
take HQLA as collateral or are considering making changes to the costs of reserves to
discourage banks from relying on the central bank to meet the LCR.
I’ll now turn to Dave Altig, who will turn the focus back “stateside” and share
some lessons from the crisis.
MR. ALTIG. Thanks, Brian. The task of the lessons from the financial crisis
workgroup was to evaluate the performance of the Federal Reserve’s monetary policy
implementation framework during the period of the financial crisis, which we defined
as running from August 2007 to May 2009. Slide 17 provides several metrics
pertaining to stress in various funding markets during this time frame.
There is disagreement among scholars as to the relative roles of illiquidity,
counterparty concerns, and asset-risk repricing as drivers of these spreads, and in the
memo, we review the research literature devoted to disentangling these effects. Our
reading of the literature suggests that all three elements were at play during the crisis,
but we emphasize that our analysis was not aimed at evaluating the necessity or the
efficacy of specific tools. Our objective was to assess the efficacy of the pre-crisis
framework in supporting the implementation of these tools once a policy course was
chosen.
As described by slide 18, the pre-crisis framework can be summarized as follows:
One, rate control was based on reserve scarcity. The level of excess reserves was
July 26–27, 2016
8 of 283
minimal, and the banking system operated on the downward-sloping part of its net
demand curve. The Desk supplied reserves to meet demand through daily open
market operations in order to manage the effective federal funds rate to the FOMC’s
target.
Two, liquidity was provided through two tools. Daily monetary policy operations
provided liquidity to the banking system via repurchase agreements with primary
dealers against government securities, and Reserve Banks made discount window, or
primary credit, loans to individual depository institutions collateralized by a broad set
of assets.
And, three, the portfolio was not a policy tool. The portfolio was simply a
byproduct of the various activities the Federal Reserve undertook as part of its
implementation framework. SOMA holdings were sized nearly equal to, and over
time grew at the same rate as, the quantity of currency in circulation. The portfolio’s
size was maintained by reinvesting the proceeds of maturing securities; portfolio
growth occurred through outright purchases of Treasury securities.
It’s worth noting that before the crisis, stress events had been moderate in both the
duration and scale of their effect on the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet and had been
managed adequately through the pre-crisis framework’s combination of traditional
open market operations and discount window lending. The 2007–09 crisis
represented an unprecedented stress test of the pre-crisis framework. The nature of
the pain points that were revealed and experience with new tools introduced to
address these shortcomings form the foundation of our analysis.
I’ll highlight five key takeaways from our review of the crisis. These lessons,
many of which will be quite familiar, were informed by research studies, transcripts
of FOMC meetings, archival MarketSource commentary, and the recollections of
Federal Reserve staff actively involved in policy implementation during that time.
Our list of lessons begins on slide 19 with the observation that, in the absence of
IOER and adequate reserve draining tools, the pre-crisis “reserve scarcity” framework
set up a tradeoff between interest-rate control and large-scale liquidity provision, a
tension that persisted until that framework was effectively abandoned post-Lehman.
As the chart on this slide illustrates, most of the liquidity provision programs
implemented over the course of the crisis represented additions to the Federal
Reserve’s balance sheet. In the absence of the ability to pay interest on reserves,
maintaining rate control required the Open Market Desk to keep the level of reserves
in a relatively narrow band. This meant that additions to reserves or liquidity arising
from various liquidity programs required offsetting reductions in reserves, or
“sterilization.” Reserve draining prior to the crisis relied primarily on redemptions of
maturing securities. This strategy for draining reserves became increasingly
inadequate following the collapse of Bear Stearns, as redemption capacity hit its limit
and liquidity programs expanded.
July 26–27, 2016
9 of 283
Our second conclusion, noted on the next slide, is that the two pre-crisis liquidity
tools, open market operations and the discount window, were themselves not
adequate to provide the type of large-scale liquidity insurance that was needed during
the crisis. Open market operations and discount window lending were confined to
limited sets of counterparties and, particularly in the case of open market operations,
collateral types. Other tools had to be created to overcome their limitations—for
example, highlighted in green text on this slide, the Term Auction Facility (or TAF)
was introduced to circumvent the stigma problem associated with the discount
window. FX swap lines with foreign central banks were activated to address broader
global demand for dollar funding in order to contain spillover to domestic markets.
The schematic on slide 20 emphasizes that the broadly based 13(3) facilities
implemented in 2008, highlighted in blue text, supported policy transmission by
reaching counterparties and collateral types beyond our normal monetary policy
operating framework of the time.
The chart on slide 21 illustrates our third takeaway. Although the federal funds
effective rate was successfully managed to the policy target for most of the period
before Lehman, intraday rate volatility was elevated throughout the crisis period and
posed an ongoing challenge to policy implementation. Intraday volatility emerged
early in the crisis as aggressive foreign bank demand in the morning gave way to
weak domestic demand in the afternoon. The primary credit rate turned out to be a
very “leaky” ceiling; once implemented, the IOER turned out to be a leaky floor. The
lack of a firm ceiling or floor complicated the day-to-day task of policy
implementation.
Our fourth takeaway is spelled out on slide 22: The System was not well
prepared to implement large-scale asset purchases once the funds rate hit the effective
lower bound. In particular, there was a significant degree of “on-the-job learning” in
order to develop a purchase program. The learning process and implementation took
time, reflecting the lack of preexisting arrangements to support these transactions.
Finally, as also noted on slide 22, the pre-crisis framework was not sufficiently
robust or flexible in the face of significant liquidity stress and disruptions to the
monetary transmission mechanisms. For example, the growth of offshore
intermediation in U.S. dollars shown on slide 23 and the expansion of nonbank
intermediation shown on slide 24 introduced new linkages across market segments,
which expanded the channels of monetary transmission. The pre-crisis framework
was not designed with these secular developments in mind and proved inadequate
when these new channels were disrupted.
Notably, the FOMC has already decided to retain standing swap arrangements
with the Bank of England, the Bank of Canada, the Bank of Japan, the ECB, and the
Swiss National Bank and has used them since the crisis period. Swap lines with these
central banks have become part of the FOMC’s normal framework and represent an
increase in the robustness of offshore market developments.
July 26–27, 2016
10 of 283
On slide 25, we summarize the timeline of tools implemented over the course of
the crisis. As indicated by the darker bars representing instruments created over the
course of the crisis, the Federal Reserve was innovative in designing and
implementing new tools to address emerging liquidity problems. This, however,
required venturing well beyond the core framework and investing heavily to
overcome gaps in our existing knowledge and infrastructure. The System lacked the
flexibility to pull nonstandard tools off the shelf to address unusual market stress.
The ad hoc nature of the response to emerging stress prolonged the time it took to
implement facilities in response and increased the System’s exposure to operational
risks.
I’ll now turn the stage over to Beth Klee, who will summarize the work of the
money markets group.
MS. KLEE. Thanks, Dave. As detailed on slide 27, we now turn our focus to the
set of short-term wholesale funding markets often referred to as money markets.
Money markets collectively help determine short-term interest rates and are a key link
in monetary policy transmission. These markets were at the center of many of the
problems that arose in the financial crisis.
To provide some background on the behavior of money markets, the next slide
shows that prior to the financial crisis, major overnight money market rates—
including those for CP, repo, federal funds, and Eurodollars—were highly correlated.
Indeed, a statistical common factor can explain nearly 95 percent of the daily
variation in these four interest rates from 2001 to 2006. In addition, money markets
operated in a way that made it fairly easy for the Federal Reserve to implement
monetary policy to keep the effective federal funds rate close to its target. In this
way, the Federal Reserve’s ability to influence rates in the federal funds market
allowed it to strongly influence rates in these related markets.
As shown on the next slide, post-crisis, measured at high frequencies, money
market rates may now be somewhat less tightly connected than in the past, although
they still retain a high degree of pass-through. In particular, the share of daily
variation explained by a common factor has declined to about 85 percent from 2010
to 2015, suggesting that there are somewhat looser linkages and greater dispersion
across these money market rates than there were in the pre-crisis period.
Although it is difficult to identify precisely all of the factors that have led to this
change in the behavior of money market rates, the memo focused on three.
Specifically, as shown on slide 30, since the crisis, significant changes in the Federal
Reserve’s monetary policy implementation framework, the business practices of some
market participants, and new regulations have left an imprint on money markets.
Today we’ll highlight a few key themes of the memo.
First, as noted on slide 31 and as Dave mentioned earlier, in the wake of the
financial crisis, the Federal Reserve altered its policy implementation framework in a
few key ways: Asset purchases contributed to a huge expansion of the Federal
July 26–27, 2016
11 of 283
Reserve’s balance sheet and the volume of excess reserve balances held by the
banking system. The Federal Reserve also implemented IOER, developed
supplementary tools to support monetary policy implementation, and expanded the
set of counterparties eligible to participate in reverse repurchase agreements.
As noted on the next slide, in part reflecting the increase in reserve balances, the
character of trading in the federal funds market changed. Banks no longer needed to
trade in the federal funds market to meet reserve requirements and manage payment
flows because most banks found themselves flush with reserves. Instead, most
federal funds trading today reflects arbitrage activity—that is, lending by FHLBs to
banks and DIs, with the latter earning the IOER. Because FHLBs do not earn IOER,
virtually all federal funds trades now take place at rates below the IOER rate. Still,
the federal funds rate remains linked to other money market rates and has responded
to changes in the Federal Reserve’s administered rates. In particular, increasing the
target range for the federal funds rate and raising the IOER and overnight RRP rates
proved effective in lifting the constellation of money market rates in December 2015.
Nonbank financial institutions are active lenders in money markets, both to banks
and to other nonbanks. As noted on slide 33, the introduction of the overnight RRP
operations created an additional direct linkage between FOMC policy actions and
nonbank financial institutions. Moreover, market participants suggest the overnight
RRP is a relevant “comparator rate”—that is, a rate that provides a reference point for
repo market participants. Furthermore, the volatility of triparty and primary-dealerreported overnight repo rates declined with the introduction of the overnight RRP,
and, more generally, the Federal Reserve’s overnight RRP operations have
established an effective floor on the level of repo rates.
The next slide highlights the second factor brought up in the memo, which is,
namely, how changes in market participants’ business practices have affected money
markets. Specifically, many firms have become more cautious in managing credit,
interest rate, and liquidity risks since the crisis. For example, Fannie Mae and
Freddie Mac ceased their unsecured lending in the federal funds market. Fannie’s
and Freddie’s withdrawal occurred amid acute stresses in European peripheral
sovereign debt markets and perhaps reflected a desire to minimize these risk
exposures.
The next slide notes the third factor that was brought up in the memo that has
affected money markets: regulations. Since the crisis, a global regulatory reform
program has put into place important new regulations to limit imprudent risk-taking,
intended to increase the safety and resiliency of the financial system. Looking
narrowly at money markets, the regulations that should have the greatest effect
include the expanded FDIC base, the money market mutual fund reforms, and the
Basel III regulatory changes, which include the supplementary leverage ratio, the
liquidity coverage ratio, and the net stable funding ratio.
Against this backdrop, individual institutions may now find it less attractive to
expand their balance sheets without a commensurate rise in capital and liquidity
July 26–27, 2016
12 of 283
positions. Consistent with this hypothesis, as shown on slide 36, the spread between
the Treasury GCF and triparty repo rates has widened considerably since 2014.
Absent frictions, arbitrage should ensure that these two rates should be identical. The
wider spread reportedly in part reflects institutional frictions, which could include
some tiering of rates for smaller dealers that generally have less access to direct
lending from money fund counterparties. Under this scenario, larger dealers borrow
from money market funds in the broader triparty market and lend the funds to smaller
dealers in the GCF market. Because the initial borrowing expands the larger dealer’s
balance sheet, the GCF rate can rise notably above the triparty rate to compensate
dealers for that expansion.
Slide 37 outlines some open issues regarding the future evolution of money
markets and their connection to an implementation framework. Conversations with
market participants suggest that the structural demand for reserves likely has
increased significantly over the pre-crisis experience, and demand for reserves may
also be more variable. The increased reserve demand stems from both precautionary
and regulatory factors as well as changes in business practices. Of course, the effects
of these factors on reserve demand are likely to be most pronounced if the Federal
Reserve also remunerates excess reserves at rates close to the level of market interest
rates. If underlying demand for reserves is much higher than in the past, there could
be upward pressure on the level of short-term interest rates and a resumption of
interbank trading in the federal funds market sooner than the point at which the staff’s
current projections involve an assumption that scarcity effects set in as a result of
SOMA redemptions.
In addition, U.S. money markets may be more stable now than pre-crisis. This
year there have been two episodes of stress in financial markets, and in both of these
cases, U.S. money markets continued to operate well. Policymakers’ views on the
fundamental stability of money markets may inform their judgments about a range of
issues associated with the long-run framework, including the size and composition of
the Federal Reserve’s balance sheet and the appropriate level of preparedness to
provide liquidity on a large scale.
To summarize, as noted on slide 38, the new regulatory environment and changes
in business models are factors that will likely have implications for various designs of
the monetary policy framework that best achieves the FOMC’s monetary policy
objectives. Some important regulatory changes are not yet in place, and market
participants may adjust their business models further in response. The monetary
policy framework can be designed to support and enhance the benefits of the new
regulatory approach in fostering a more resilient financial system with the
understanding that a central bank’s implementation framework is a critical
determinant of behavior in money markets. I’ll now turn the presentation over to
Julie Remache.
MS. REMACHE. Thank you, Beth. Before turning the session over to your
questions and comments and as a way to summarize our work, I’d like to highlight a
few significant themes emerging from the work presented today as they relate to the
July 26–27, 2016
13 of 283
set of key goals for a future implementation framework. Simon began our
presentation with these, and they are repeated for your reference on slide 40.
The first goal highlights the need for the framework to be robust during periods of
financial stress and in response to structural changes in the financial system. The
money market work highlighted many of the important regulations that have been put
in place in recent years. As Beth noted, these regulations, which are meant to
improve the stability of the financial system, require that financial institutions
increase the amount of liquid assets that they hold to provide some measure of selfinsurance. These regulations certainly increase the demand for high-quality liquid
assets. And it’s possible that they may also affect the demand for reserves—as Beth
noted, particularly so if they are remunerated at a rate close to market rates. This may
lead to a higher overall level of reserves than in the pre-crisis regime, leading the
Federal Reserve’s balance sheet to be somewhat larger, even if it were to return to a
scarce reserves regime.
The second goal stipulates that the framework should allow the Federal Reserve
to achieve its macroeconomic and financial stability objectives at the effective lower
bound. The foreign experience work highlights a range of policy actions undertaken
by other central banks, including the use of asset purchases, long-term funding
programs, and negative rates. If the probability of revisiting the effective lower
bound, perhaps routinely, in the future is reasonably high, and the duration of those
visits is as long as the one we have just experienced, this will have a pronounced
effect on the structure of the framework, including the set of tools that are chosen and
the structure of the balance sheet.
The third goal stipulates that the framework should support the ability to address
liquidity strains in money markets and to support financial stability. The work
presented this morning highlights a range of issues related to the interaction of
liquidity insurance and the monetary policy implementation framework. These
included tradeoffs in the pre-crisis framework between providing liquidity to address
marketwide stress and maintaining interest rate control, the role that liquidity
insurance operations played during the crisis in supporting the transmission of policy
rates, and the experience not only in the United States during the crisis, but also at
other central banks subsequently, with the benefits of providing liquidity to a broader
range of counterparties and against a wider set of collateral to support policy
transmission. Of course, such potential benefits should be weighed against potential
costs—which may include increased operational complexity and possible incentives
created for counterparties to increase allocation to less liquid assets.
Thank you, Madam Chair. That completes our presentation.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Before we turn to Q&A on the presentations and papers,
I’d like to take this opportunity to thank our presenters and all of the staff across the System who
have contributed to this very extensive project. The documents we received for today’s meeting
July 26–27, 2016
14 of 283
come from the foundational workgroups. And I believe they serve the very useful function of
helping to establish a common understanding of our implementation framework, its evolution
through the crisis, features of frameworks at foreign central banks, and the operation of money
markets.
As described in the staff memos, our pre-crisis approach for implementing policy was not
adequate for dealing with the severe disruptions caused by the financial crisis. In response, we
made many innovations to provide liquidity to the financial system and to provide additional
monetary policy accommodation once the federal funds rate was lowered to the effective lower
bound. Some of these innovations remain key elements of our current framework. And, in
thinking about our framework in the longer run, it’s useful to recognize how much has changed
since before the crisis.
To my mind, perhaps the most significant enhancement to our implementation framework
has been the authority granted to us by the Congress to pay interest on reserve balances. The
IOER effectively severed the link between the quantity of reserves in the banking system and the
level of short-term interest rates. As a result, the tensions we faced in the early stages of the
crisis between providing liquidity on a large scale and maintaining control of the federal funds
rate is largely resolved. The ability to pay interest on reserves also helped enable us to employ
another key policy tool—namely, large-scale asset purchases. LSAPs are an effective tool for
providing monetary stimulus. But in the absence of a predictable means by which we can
subsequently scale back policy accommodation as the economy recovers, of the kind made
possible by IOER, LSAPs would carry greater risks—and, therefore, would be less effective.
Looking ahead, if the equilibrium federal funds rate remains lower in future decades than
in past ones, the effective lower bound may bind more frequently. It seems likely, then, that
July 26–27, 2016
15 of 283
LSAPs will remain an important part of our toolkit to respond to the wide range of shocks we
face.
A third innovation in our framework has been the establishment of standing swap lines
with foreign central banks. These lines provide an important backstop with which to limit
funding strains in offshore dollar funding markets. As we saw in the crisis, such strains can have
material adverse effects on our financial system and the domestic economy.
Of course, the key objective of the long-run framework project is to identify changes that
could further enhance our implementation framework, and I hope you will mention such areas in
your remarks today. One area I would highlight is the discount window. We have long grappled
with the problem of stigma, which interferes with the efficient provision of liquidity to
depository institutions and prevents the primary credit facility from serving as an effective
ceiling on the federal funds rate. As the experience of other countries shows, this need not be the
case. This problem is an undesirable feature of our framework, and I believe it merits further
attention.
Another shortcoming of our current framework is the inability of IOER to provide a firm
floor on the federal funds rate. Our supplementary tools—notably, the overnight RRP as well as
our term draining tools—may well give us all the control we need over short-term interest rates
from a macroeconomic perspective. But having the market-determined level of the federal funds
rate and other overnight rates trade below IOER contributes to the impression that banks are
getting a special deal with us. That impression is amplified by the very large amount of reserves
in the banking system and the associated large payments to commercial banks of interest on their
reserve balances. It’s easy to explain why we have such a configuration of interest rates, due to
the elevated level of reserves in the banking system. But it does put us in a defensive position.
July 26–27, 2016
16 of 283
So let me stop there. We have allocated plenty of time today for a good discussion, so
please feel free to ask a lot of questions and to make comments. I know that the staff would
appreciate hearing your thoughts about the direction of future work. At the November FOMC
meeting, we will have an opportunity to discuss the work of the framework workgroups, which
are examining interest rate targets, operating regimes, and balance sheet policies. While I don’t
anticipate that we will need to make critical decisions about our longer-run framework anytime
soon, I hope that this discussion and our next one will better position us for that eventuality.
Let’s now open the floor for questions to the staff, and after the Q&A, we will have an
opportunity to comment for anyone who would like to do so. Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. I have a question, and I don’t know that the staff has the
answer to it or that I have an answer to it. The framework objectives basically imply that this is
about monetary policy implementation, it’s about financial stability, and it implies that financial
stability is important in terms of thinking about what the right framework is. But then, when we
come down to the Policy Normalization Principles and Plans, a framework should involve
holding “no more securities than necessary to implement monetary policy efficiently and
effectively.” So one seems narrower than the other, and I just was wondering how the staff was
thinking about that. Let’s imagine that we have a monetary policy framework that has huge
benefits for financial stability but might require somewhat more securities. Do we think that the
policy normalization principles are cast in stone, or could they be potentially modified? I just
would like the staff’s view on this.
MR. POTTER. I’m not sure that’s a question for the staff. [Laughter]
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Let me ask it this way: Is there a tension between these
two things? They do seem a little bit in opposition to one another. And I think it would be
July 26–27, 2016
17 of 283
interesting, as we discuss this, to decide: Do we really believe the framework should be broad
and include financial-stability objectives, or should it be narrow and just focused on monetary
policy implementation?
MR. TARULLO. Madam Chair. My recollection, Vice Chairman Dudley, is that when
we were talking about that stated principle of normalization, there was a little bit of back-andforth within the Committee, basically saying that’s an issue that does have some tension in it
because you could interpret effective monetary policy as meaning: You don’t want a monetary
policy that creates financial instability, because that would require reactions later. But my
recollection is, we self-consciously tabled the tensions inherent in that issue, and so my sense
was that it’s precisely one of the things that this exercise is going to have to address.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Yes. I just wanted to get that out on the table.
CHAIR YELLEN. Questions for the presenters? Let me see, President Rosengren.
MR. ROSENGREN. My question is on the international side, and it relates to one of the
things that came out of the crisis, nonbank SIFIs, which wasn’t something that most countries
were thinking about before the crisis. For most countries, those were insurance companies and
broker-dealers, depending on whether they were included or not included in commercial banks.
Do other countries make liquidity available to anybody classified as a SIFI? Are we unique in
that respect, or is that fairly common internationally? So, for example, we had GE, we have
insurance companies, and we’re viewing them as systemically-important institutions, but we’re
not giving them access to the discount window, which presumably means that even though they
are systemically important, we’re not worried about liquidity problems with those organizations
or we’re choosing not to address that. Are we unique among the countries that you interviewed,
or perhaps this may be a little too institutional?
July 26–27, 2016
18 of 283
MR. DOYLE. No, not at all. There are some central banks that have extended their
counterparties beyond banks, even beyond broker-dealers. The Bank of England is one example
that has, in effect, explicitly said: Our framework is to give liquidity insurance to anyone we feel
is systemically important for liquidity, subject to liquidity shocks, and is adequately regulated.
And so the Bank of England allows, for example, for CCPs. Another case is the Swiss National
Bank’s inclusion of insurance companies, although I am not sure whether it is explicitly thinking
about SIFIs. In fact, the Swiss National Bank also includes banks that aren’t actually operating
in Switzerland but might be operating in Swiss franc markets. So it takes regulation in the euro
area, regulation in the United Kingdom, as being adequate for its purposes in order to lend to
those institutions.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Yes. Thank you, Madam Chair. I have two questions. One is for Dave
Altig. This has to do with the narrative about the lessons of the crisis. The paper, I think early,
mentions sales of U.S. government securities and the extent to which we resorted to that to
sterilize and offset the effect of lending programs on aggregate reserves, in order to avoid driving
interest rates down. Then, later on, the paper seems to drop that option and says we didn’t have
any way to do that. And my sense from the narrative is that we didn’t sell all the securities we
could have, and it wasn’t clear why not. Now, I know some were pledged or lent out in the
TSLF, right? But my sense is, not all of them, but I guess I could look that up. Did we sell or
encumber all of the U.S. Treasury securities we could have? If we didn’t, why did we stop short
of selling U.S. government securities at the time we did?
July 26–27, 2016
19 of 283
MS. MCLAUGHLIN. We sold quite a few securities. Between March and May of 2008,
we sold about $8 billion or $9 billion in bills, which is about 45 percent of the holdings at that
time. That’s actually after we had redeemed a substantial number of securities in the run-up to
the Bear Stearns time frame. We also sold about $55 billion in coupon securities, which
represented about 12 percent of our holdings. So we had run down a fair amount of the portfolio,
and then in that March and May period, we sold another very sizable chunk. It’s true that we
didn’t sell all of them, and it’s also true, as you noted, that some of the securities we needed to
hold, in part because those securities were serving as collateral or lend-out securities for
programs like the TSLF.
MR. LACKER. So there were a couple hundred billion we could have sold?
MS. MCLAUGHLIN. Yes. I don’t have the exact numbers. There were some securities.
They were, I believe, principally long-duration securities.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Isn’t the point, though, that we didn’t need to sell them
because we hadn’t added sufficient reserves that we had to offset?
MR. LACKER. Well, there’s this point at which we did, right?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. No, no. I know, I know. But the point is, at the time, we
were basically saying, “Well, we can sell securities, and we can expand our liquidity provisions,
but we don’t want to be too aggressive in terms of our liquidity provision, because then we might
have to sell a whole lot of securities, and then we’re not sure what the market effect is going to
be.” So we basically were very conscious of how the liquidity provisions were going to add
reserves to the banking system and our ability to actually offset that by draining. Now, we did
sell securities, because that’s what we had to do to offset the reserves that we added.
MR. LACKER. Right.
July 26–27, 2016
20 of 283
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. We didn’t do more because that’s the volume of reserves
we essentially had issued.
MR. POTTER. So I think your point, President Lacker, might be that the Desk could
have sold all of the outrights and just run a repo book. That repo book would have been more
flexible, and that would have perhaps given you three or four days in September 2008.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. We would have had more capacity.
MR. LACKER. So let me see if I get this straight. Before this chart does the hockeystick thing on page 19, no question, we sold what we did, and we sterilized effectively. I’m not
disputing that. But the assessment that comes out—and, Madam Chair, you repeated this—that
our crisis framework was inadequate for the liquidity provision. I just want to pinpoint in what
way it was.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. We could have built up more capacity.
MR. LACKER. Is that resting on the notion that we didn’t have enough securities to
sell—following what happened after October 2008, in view of the reserve injections that
occurred after that, in light of the lending that occurred after that? We didn’t have enough
securities to sell—is that the idea?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Well, there is the gap between September and October
when the TARP legislation gives us the authority to pay interest on reserves? It’s really during
that month that we were exposed.
MR. LACKER. Right.
MR. POTTER. Well, there’s clearly that. There is the issue in the spring and the
summer of 2008 when the TAF and swaps were there, but they had a limit on the usage. We’ve
had a long discussion on this. I don’t think this was the first binding constraint in policymakers’
July 26–27, 2016
21 of 283
minds, but from the operational perspective, when Vice Chairman Dudley and his staff were
thinking through about how to describe for you what we could do, they were constantly thinking
at the back of their minds, “We have to be careful here, because there’s only a limited amount we
can do if we have a lot of usage of, say, the TAF, or the swaps, to control the federal funds rate.”
And the federal funds rate was well above zero. It was about 2¼ percent at that time.
MR. LACKER. Well, then we could have sold more securities outright, right?
MR. POTTER. Exactly. The Desk could have come to you and said, “Over the next few
months, we are now going to liquidate all of the Treasury portfolio, run a repo book, and that
will give you more flexibility to size up these programs.”
MR. LACKER. But, even short of that, I don’t see what the problem would have been
then.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Part of the issue is, you don’t have foresight about
what’s going to come. You don’t know that Lehman weekend is coming down the road, right?
You could sell a lot of securities to build up your capacity, but then you have the cost of how that
could potentially disrupt the Treasury securities market, and do you want to do that or not?
MR. LACKER. Well, we were lowering rates.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Right. Selling bills and short-dated coupon securities is
probably not going to have much effect on the Treasury securities market or the Treasury yield
curve, but if we had sold a lot of longer-dated Treasur securities, I think there’s a question of
what that would do to the market. It’s a judgment call.
MR. POTTER. I think if we look back, there are many things we would have done in a
different way.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Oh, absolutely.
July 26–27, 2016
22 of 283
MR. POTTER. That’s certainly true, but from the interviews that we’ve done, this was a
constraint in people’s minds. I don’t think it was a primary constraint in policymakers’ minds.
For them, there were a lot of issues—moral hazard and dealing with whether we could have such
large programs and what that would look like. Optically, that ended in the middle of September
2008.
CHAIR YELLEN. Didn’t the Treasury come along and help us manage this problem
substantially by running up its own balances?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Correct, and it helped drain reserves by holding more.
CHAIR YELLEN. And that was before October?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Yes.
MR. LACKER. I have a second question. It’s for Beth Klee. In your presentation, you
talked about linkages, and this shows up in the paper, too. There’s this graph on slide 28 that
shows pre-crisis rates are highly correlated, and then on slide 29 it says that rates may be less
connected at high frequencies. On 28, all the rates are really close to each other and the lines
kind of overlap, and then on 29, they wiggle around a lot and they’re far apart. But then, the
scales are different. To your credit and in all fairness, you cite, I think, some econometric work,
something about what fraction of variance is explained by a common factor.
MS. KLEE. Yes. That’s just doing a simple principal component analysis.
MR. LACKER. Okay. So when I look the one on 28, the pre-crisis, and I think about a
common factor there, I’m thinking, that would be us, right, moving interest rates around?
MS. KLEE. Yes.
MR. LACKER. And then in your second sample, we’re not moving interest rates around
much at all. We do it once at the end. You’re not going to get the federal funds rate target or
July 26–27, 2016
23 of 283
some policy rate as being the common factor. So, you’d expect the fraction of variance
explained by the common factor to go down, right, and that would not to really reflect any
difference in meaningful linkages or the extent to which market rates would move if we raised
rates as much as we did on slide 28. Is that intuition correct, Beth?
MS. KLEE. I think it is to some degree. It’s basically a statistical exercise—it’s pretty
agnostic. I think that you’re going to see the rates travel more together if you have the policy
rates moving things, and so, therefore, that will explain more. To be technical about it: We take
out the mean. We control for these kinds of things, but—
MR. LACKER. You don’t take out the movement in the funds rate.
MS. KLEE. No, we don’t take out the movement in the funds rate.
MR. LACKER. Okay.
MS. KLEE. But in terms of the behavior of the constellation of rates when you move,
let’s say, either the federal funds rate target or, in this case, the administered rates, in both cases
the constellation of money market rates moved up. And so is 95 percent very different from 85
percent, particularly when you’re at the effective lower bound? That’s probably a judgment call.
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Fisher.
MR. FISCHER. Thank you, Madam Chair. Somebody said earlier that they weren’t sure
they should raise this issue, and I’m not sure I should raise this issue except that it’s important.
The big thing that happened last time was at the time of the failure of Lehman Brothers. And
that made a difference to the entire world. Now, there’s nothing as far as I can see that prevents
us coming to a day on which we don’t have a tool to deal with a similar situation. So what are
we going to do on that day?
July 26–27, 2016
24 of 283
MR. TARULLO. Are you waiting for an answer, sir?
MR. FISCHER. Well, the question I’m raising is what are we allowed to do?
CHAIR YELLEN. Do you mean what facilities do we have?
MR. FISCHER. Yes, Are we allowed to go to the FDIC and start putting this institution
into bankruptcy or at least into the FDIC’s care, with some hope that we’ve done enough work
that will enable us to prevent that having massive repercussions?
CHAIR YELLEN. Under Title 2?
MR. FISCHER. Under Title 2.
CHAIR YELLEN. And the FDIC has the ability to tap liquidity and lend to that
institution.
MR. FISCHER. Yes.
CHAIR YELLEN. We still have 13(3) powers to put in place broad-based programs if
it’s not a single institution.
MR. FISCHER. Yes, well, if we had five Lehmans, we would have had a bigger
problem.
MR. POTTER. Five investment banks.
MR. LAUBACH. But, Governor Fischer, just to be clear, for the purpose of this project,
we decided deliberately—and I believe also with your blessing—that we would actually stay
away from the explicit evaluation of, for example, 13(3) facilities, because we felt that they were
not part of a normal implementation framework. Now, as you saw from the material, clearly
there is a bit of a gray area here, in the sense that you cannot completely exclude the topic of
liquidity provision, because it turns out that liquidity provision and the implementation
framework are very closely tied. That said, I think what our work here has primarily focused on
July 26–27, 2016
25 of 283
are questions such as, If you had to greatly expand the provision of liquidity, how would you still
be able to control short-term interest rates in order to implement the particular chosen stance for
monetary policy?
I’m afraid that it was by design that this project was not intended to address the question
that you just raised.
MR. FISCHER. That’s clear, and if I agreed with that some time ago, then I plead guilty.
But, at some point, we’re going to have to look at this issue. We’ve got a plan, which is not
entirely “fair weather” sailing, but there are things that it doesn’t quite go into in the same depth
that it might. We’ve got to find a way of doing the best we can to figure out what we would do
in similar circumstances because they can quite well arise. It’s not that we banned them by
saying that you got rid of too-big-to-fail. If somebody eventually says “yes,” then it’s gone, but
that hasn’t happened, so we had better come back to it in some way, shape, or form, with the
attendant political difficulties being taken into account. It’s a very tough issue, as I’m sure I
don’t have to say.
CHAIR YELLEN. And our powers have been restricted in Dodd-Frank, but we still do
have substantial 13(3) powers to create facilities to address strains, and in Dodd-Frank we got the
ability, if we deemed it important, to lend to a CCP or a designated financial market utility if it
encountered strains, which could be a different kind of problem that afflicts the financial system.
We’re not completely without powers, but they’re certainly not as broad as some other countries
have and have regularly put into effect.
MR. FISCHER. Okay.
CHAIR YELLEN. Other questions for the staff? President Rosengren.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Madam Chair. Sorry for the second question.
July 26–27, 2016
26 of 283
CHAIR YELLEN. Please feel free. We’ve got a lot of time.
MR. ROSENGREN. This is an international question again. I’m looking at slide 8 on
the policy rates and the distinction between market and administered rates, and it’s striking how
many chose administered rates rather than market rates. When I think of the IOER, it’s a leaky
floor, which is, in some sense, by design. It’s a leaky floor because we didn’t give nonbanks
access to the administered rate. Are there any other central banks that chose to have a leaky
floor by design?
In some sense, you could view us as having an administered rate, because it’s really
weird that only the GSEs are trading in the federal funds market. So we’ve created, kind of by
design, an artificial market that’s very tied to the administered rate. The arbitrage works through
foreign banks, but because of the FDIC, they’re getting arbitrage profits relative to the GSEs,
which are government entities. It’s kind of a weird set of constraints that we’ve imposed to
make this a market. In some sense, I’d be interested whether anybody else has this kind of
characteristic. Are all of these administered rates truly administered rates, or is what they’ve
done to avoid leaky floors to allow other people to participate in the administered rate besides
depositories?
MR. DOYLE. If you turn to slide 11, I don’t know if they tried to do this by design or
not, but you can see in the case of both the Bank of England, which is depicted in the purple line,
and the Bank of Japan, shown in the dark blue line, money market rates are trading far below
their floor. And that includes some nonbank participants who are not part of or don’t have
access to accounts that get remunerated trading with banks that do have access. So it is this sort
of arbitrage activity. I don’t know whether it’s by design or not.
July 26–27, 2016
27 of 283
MR. ROSENGREN. So those are administered rates or market rates when they have
those examples. That’s similar to us, right?
MR. DOYLE. In both of these cases, they are administered rates.
MR. POTTER. I don’t think they have a government-sponsored enterprise that has an
account at the central bank that can run transactions through that account but is not eligible to
earn that central bank rate. That is somewhat different, and it affects the federal funds market. If
you paid out to the GSEs, the federal funds rate would likely then trade above the effective rate
where the IOER is. Remember, that market is relatively small compared with the Eurodollar
market in which the nonbanks, which are the money funds, are much bigger transactors. You’d
still have that wedge, and that’s really what you see in the United Kingdom and Japan.
MR. DOYLE. This is a conjecture. I also don’t know if the statement is 100 percent
true. It is the case that you see that the rates trade not as below the floor in the case of the BOJ
and BOE. And that may be due to their having a broader set of counterparties, and it may also be
due to their having a much smaller nonbank sector. But, you know, that’s a conjecture.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Other questions? Governor Fischer.
MR. FISCHER. On page 12, there’s a discussion about liquidity provision to a broader
range of institutions, and then there’s bullet 4, which is that central banks see advantages to
having a more level playing field and to getting information about the institutions to which they
are lending, but that we need to be worried about moral hazard. That’s not written—that was
said. As far as I can see—and I think you said this in the written paper—the Bank of England,
for instance, has just tried to get rid of the moral-hazard aspects in the way it has set up these
facilities, or something like these facilities. And the question is, should we be saying, well, in
July 26–27, 2016
28 of 283
essence, moral hazard is a barrier that we can’t overcome, or should we try to think of
institutional arrangements like the Bank of England has developed?
MR. DOYLE. One thing that a number of foreign banks expressed was that getting at
moral hazard might be more of a supervisory and regulatory issue than an issue for liquidity
insurance.
MR. TARULLO. But, of course, the Bank of England is the supervisor.
MR. DOYLE. Yes. So they would try to use those powers, although they were not the
supervisor, necessarily, in all instances, I guess.
MR. TARULLO. They are the only prudential supervisor.
MR. DOYLE. Okay. They are now. Yes, you’re right, I’m sorry.
MR. POTTER. That wasn’t the case partly when they designed this, but that’s the
situation now.
MR. DOYLE. Now.
MR. POTTER. It’s also true that that’s the change at the ECB.
MR. DOYLE. Although, in the case of the ECB, they don’t have the broadest set of
counterparties.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Kaplan.
MR. KAPLAN. I’ll get to this in the comments, but I gathered in reading all this—which
I thought was very well done and obviously very helpful for me—that while you didn’t address
some of the sensitivity about what powers we have and don’t have, you laid it out so that part of
the guidance we can offer in our comments should be: What should we have? And then we can
have a separate discussion about how to get from here to there? And the BOE is the one that
naturally you gravitate toward, because what they have—and we’ll get to this later—seems like a
July 26–27, 2016
29 of 283
good thing to have. The issue here I gather is: How do we get to where we actually have the
ability to do the same thing the Bank of England does? I take it that’s a little trickier question.
MR. POTTER. My view is that the law, especially the Federal Reserve Act, is what we
take. It gives the Federal Reserve tremendous power. Before the crisis, the Bank of England
operated in a way that was much narrower in terms of the collateral that they would take. The
discount window will take a range of collateral, which is very wide compared with most central
banks.
MR. KAPLAN. So we might actually have the power.
MR. POTTER. There, you limit the type of counterparties. With open market
operations, if you’re prepared to narrow to a particular type of collateral, you can have a wide
range of counterparties.
MR. KAPLAN. Okay.
MR. POTTER. Within that construction, subject to some really important issues,
whatever decisions that you take, you have to think about the incentives you are putting into
money markets and about the financial institutions there. We can’t just be thinking of the case of
how would we lend a lot of money at a certain time? We have to think of how likely we are to
get to that situation, because we have incentives in place for those folks to take risks, because
they know that the Federal Reserve is there.
MR. KAPLAN. But that’s why we’re doing this exercise, to think through these things in
advance, right?
MR. POTTER. It’s part of the reason, yes.
MR. DOYLE. I guess I’d only add that part of the reason we cite the Bank of England
frequently is that it is a central bank that has done a lot of thinking and enacted a lot of change
July 26–27, 2016
30 of 283
from where it was pre-2006, even before the crisis. The BOE changed its system before the
crisis, and we saw a lot of evolution during the crisis. Because they’ve done a lot of thinking,
it’s a lot of grist in the mill.
MR. KAPLAN. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay. Any further questions?
MR. LACKER. Madam Chair—
CHAIR YELLEN. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Yes. Let me just add a comment to echo what Thomas Laubach said.
We have the luxury now of separating questions of monetary control and interest rate control
from credit extension. When we were founded, the founders made a choice to combine those
two, and it was based on the monetary system at the time of the gold standard and the fact that
government finance, if it was monetized, tended to be associated with wartime departures from
the gold standard and inflation—or, if done in peacetime, associated with inflation. The
founders explicitly chose not to focus on government-debt backing for the money we would
issue but instead used the discount window in its mechanism. Very rapidly after that, we got
plenty of government securities, and we’ve figured out over the last century how to run central
banks with a portfolio in which the money they issue is backed by government securities and
without having that be inflationary. It was for a time in the ’70s, but it isn’t now.
But that gives us the luxury of separating granting credit to the private sector from how
much liquidity we provide—and I use that word in the sense of our monetary liabilities that we
provide to the system. Now, liquidity is also used in these papers—a little sloppily—to refer to
credit extension, in which you are lending somebody those assets. To provide them to the
system, people can exchange assets to acquire our liabilities. But that’s not the same as our
July 26–27, 2016
31 of 283
lending them to them. That division we can do, and so I think, on Thomas’s point, either we
separate thinking about liquidity provision and liquidity extension from monetary control or we
don’t. And if we are going to go down the road of combining the two, using credit extension as
part of monetary control, opens up a big can of worms. But I would just put in a pitch for
keeping those separate in our discussions.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. I have a follow-up for President Lacker. Could you elaborate on what
you mean? Because I took the point of the memos to be that these are not really separable
things, and therefore we have to design a system that appropriately balances the ability to
provide monetary control and the ability to provide liquidity in a crisis. And you just said, you
could separate these two things. So, what do you mean?
MR. LACKER. Well, I was going to get to this in my prepared remarks. At the risk of
some perseveration, I’ll just say that what I am proposing is a very simple regime in which we
pay interest on reserves and ignore everything else in the world—not ignore it, but don’t adopt
an explicit target for the funds rate, just drop that. Our policy rate is our administered rate, and
that’s it. And we count on arbitrage, as we do now, to align rates with that. So that’s a crisp,
pure polar model, and in that world, you know, our balance sheet can be whatever it is.
MR. BULLARD. Okay. So the point would be, it’s an administered rate.
MR. LACKER. Right. In that simple regime there doesn’t seem to be any tension
between monetary control and credit extension, right? We can extend credit, and we keep the
IOER where it is, and arbitrage presumably keeps everything where it is. So we don’t have to
sterilize anything. We just don’t have an issue. So the tension doesn’t arise in that scenario.
July 26–27, 2016
32 of 283
MR. BULLARD. Okay. So your point would be that a lot hinges on an administered
rate versus a market rate?
MR. LACKER. Right. An administered rate with a floor. With other systems, like
reserve scarcity systems, you have to sterilize things. You have to deal with this issue. That was
the point—that, if there is going to be a tension, if the staff is going to ask us to consider
something in which there is some tradeoff, we haven’t seen a serious ex post review of our credit
programs. They are going to be asking us to make some choice, on the basis of the costs and
benefits of preparedness for liquidity provision programs, credit extension programs. I think we
would want something about the economic advantages and disadvantages of various levels of
preparedness for credit extension by a central bank. So I previewed my comments there.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you.
MR. LACKER. Certainly.
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay. A number of people have asked to comment. If others who
are not on this list wish to be added, just let us know. Let’s begin our comment opportunity with
the Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Thank you. I think we all have to agree that the staff
have given us a lot to digest, and there’s obviously going to be much more to come on this. I
thought this round of work was very thorough and thoughtful. So thank you for that.
That said, I do think it’s extraordinarily premature to make any strong assertions about
what the long-run framework should look like at this point because I think there’s a lot more
work and assessment to do before we reach that point. As I see it, this is a very big and complex
subject, and, speaking for myself, I am going to need some time to get my head fully around the
July 26–27, 2016
33 of 283
key issues and the potential alternatives and tradeoffs. Nevertheless, I’d like to make a couple of
comments at this very early stage.
My first comment, which is consistent with the framework objectives that were laid out
for us, is that we need to pick a framework that’s not just best suited for monetary policy
execution, but that is also best suited to achieving our financial-stability objectives. I can
imagine a framework that had significant financial-stability benefits—because it included a
broader set of counterparties, or it had stronger liquidity backstops, or it had liquidity backstops
that had less stigma—but it might be a little bit more complex than a simpler system might be in
terms of monetary policy execution. I might be willing to accept a little bit more complicated,
elaborate monetary policy execution in exchange for those financial stability benefits. So I think
we want to cast the net large and understand that we’re maximizing across both of these regimes,
monetary policy implementation and financial stability.
The second point is that, as the SOMA manager in 2007 and 2008, I don’t disagree with
anything the staff said. I thought the lessons of the financial crisis with respect to monetary
policy implementation are pretty clear. The setup then was not well suited for providing
liquidity to the system. We did encounter a conflict between the goal of supplying liquidity and
maintaining monetary control in 2007 and much of 2008. We didn’t move to particularly large
liquidity-assisted programs because we were worried about the consequences of that for reserves.
Only quite late in the fall of 2008, with the TARP legislation, did we get the opportunity to move
to the interest-on-reserves framework under which, in my mind, we were finally able to establish
credible, broad backstops without the risk of losing monetary policy control. And, if you think
about it, the crisis might have been less severe if we had been able to put such broad, open-ended
backstops in place sooner. We couldn’t do that because we were worried about monetary policy
July 26–27, 2016
34 of 283
control, but if we had had broad, credible backstops in place, I think there would have been less
incentive for counterparties to pull away because they’d know that there would have been a way
of getting cash back at the end of the day. Also, I think there were a number of other problems
that I’d like to avoid in the future. I think the stigma associated with the discount window
borrowing, which the Chair talked about, was a huge problem. To me, another problem that
came up during the crisis that we need to consider was that we did supply a lot of liquidity to the
banking system, but that was not necessarily lent on to other important parts of the financial
system. In a hybrid system like we have—banks, nonbanks, a pretty big capital market—how do
we have a system to ensure that the credit actually gets to the people that need it? Getting it to
the banks may not be sufficient.
The third point I would just make is, although it’s still in the early day to reach firm
conclusions, I have to say that my current inclination is not to go back to the corridor system that
we had before the crisis. I viewed that as operationally cumbersome and at times ineffective at
keeping the federal funds rate where we want it to be. I remember the fact that we had these
fluctuations in the federal funds rate within a given day—higher in the morning in Europe and
then lower later in the day. You know, that was probably not a big problem in terms of effective
monetary policy, but then in September 2008, it actually got worse. We had difficulty keeping
the federal funds rate close to our target right after the Lehman Brothers failure. At the same
time, I don’t think we want or need to operate a regime in which the Federal Reserve has the
kind of extraordinary large balance sheet as it does today. I think the benefits of a floor system
can be achieved with a much smaller balance sheet.
The fourth point I would make is, I hope we all just remain open minded about where all
this is going. This means being open minded not just about the framework, but also not
July 26–27, 2016
35 of 283
prematurely ruling out seeking other changes that might make a particular monetary policy
originally more effective. For example, I can imagine that after all the work is done, we can
conclude that seeking changes to the leverage ratio requirements that might exempt bank reserve
holdings with the Federal Reserve from the leverage-ratio calculation or seeking changes via
legislation or via regulation that would change our set of counterparties might result in a more
effective monetary policy regime, and I don’t think we should necessarily rule them out ex ante.
We should consider them carefully—What’s the benefit of trying to push down these certain
avenues against some of the constraints that we face?—and see if that’s worth it or not.
I also think changing our target from the federal funds rate to some other rate is certainly
something we should consider. I think an interesting open question is: What are the pros and
cons of targeting an administered rate versus a market rate? I frankly don’t see a particular
benefit of targeting a market rate. If you target an administered rate and the market rates move
consistently with that administered rate, it seem to me like an administered rate works just fine.
But I’d like that issue developed a little bit more fully.
Finally, I do think there are some important issues that could be more fully developed.
One thing that runs through the memo is this issue of interbank activity in the money markets. I
guess I have a fundamental question: In and of itself, is interbank activity in the money market a
good thing? When I step back and consider it at a little higher level, we want a financial system
that allows efficient intermediation between savers and borrowers. In an ideal system, savers
meet borrowers. There’s no need for anybody in the middle. They meet, and they exchange.
We’re all done. It seems to me that having a view that we want interbank money market activity
means we’re actually putting more stuff in the middle, more cost and more complexity, which
might not necessarily be a good thing. So I’m not sure that interbank activity is necessarily a
July 26–27, 2016
36 of 283
good thing. I wouldn’t go in a priori thinking that’s a positive, and I’d like to see more work on
that.
The second issue I thought that would be interesting to explore a little further is whether
the issuance of Federal Reserve bills is in scope for this project. It seems to me that Federal
Reserve bills have a lot of advantages. You’d have a much broader set of counterparties. It
would drain reserves, and we could drain as much of reserves as we want. It would allow us to
lean much less heavily on the interest on excess reserves so that you could get away from the
idea that we’re favoring banks. So it seems to me that the Federal Reserve bill issuance is
probably worth some consideration.
And then the final meta questions I have are: How does the framework influence the size
of the banking system versus the nonbank system, and how is that relevant to financial stability?
We’re going to make choices that could either encourage the banking system to grow because
we’re providing benefit to being a bank, or we could offer a system that makes being a bank a
little bit less attractive, and so banks could shrink. So I think we need to think about how we
treat banks versus nonbanks as we go through this process and how that’s likely to affect the
future evolution of the financial system. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Williams.
MR. WILLIAMS. Thank you, Madam Chair. I agree with your opening remarks that
this is very useful material. Even though I’ve been in the Federal Reserve throughout this
period, it was nice to have all of the documents together, highlighting the key issues and open
questions.
In terms of open questions, the thing that struck me in reading through the very thorough
memos—and I agree here with the Vice Chairman—was the sense that there are still the same
July 26–27, 2016
37 of 283
open questions today that we had the last time we discussed this. One example is how
regulations—especially in money market funds, in banking—will affect the demand for reserves
or affect relative activity in money markets and interest rates and things like that. That’s still an
ongoing process, so I think there’s time for us to learn more from that.
Another open question—and I do have a solution for this, but maybe I’ll save it for
tomorrow—is that we haven’t really progressed very far on policy normalization. [Laughter]
Some of the big questions we had were on the role of the ON RRP and its size: what the scale of
the ON RRP will be as we raise interest rates and how that will affect market conditions. We
started with this very open-ended, large approach to the program so that we could have very
good interest rate control. That’s been successful, but I still think we have a lot to learn as we do
raise rates about how that will actually function and the pros and cons of that.
So like the Vice Chairman commented, I think it is premature to come to conclusions
either here or November. In fact, I guess my main point I would like to make is, I’m worried a
little bit about the timeline here. It’s great that we have a discussion today and maybe in
November to intellectually think about these issues. In view of some of the uncertainties and
questions that will still be open, I’m just not sure whether we’re going to have the information
we need even in 2017, which is when, I think, we’re supposed to have the kind of meeting at
which we actually try to come to agreement on some of this. I guess my one bit of advice is not
to try to hold to some fixed timeline in coming to decisions, but to have that be on the basis of
what we’ve learned and the events, say, over the next year.
Going back to the issue that Governor Fischer and others have brought up in their
questions, I do think, in setting up this new framework, we need to consider seriously what we
think the risks are and what the distribution of the risks that we’re worried about is. In normal
July 26–27, 2016
38 of 283
times, I think any framework works fine. [Laughter] I think that’s the international experience.
It doesn’t matter in normal times how we do monetary policy. It’s fine. The issues that you
really want to think about the situations that are either very stressful from a financial-sector point
of view, the zero lower bound, negative interest rates. And I think that does force us to actually
think about what the likely scenarios are, not specifically about a Lehman Brothers or an AIG
kind of scenario, but more generally about what the problem is that we’re trying to solve?
Personally, because of my view on the low equilibrium real interest rate or natural rate of
interest, I am mostly scared, if you will, about effective lower bounds, and I heard the word
“visit.” I feel this was like my son moving back home. The effective-lower-bound episodes are
not visits, they’re kind of stay-for-many-years situations. [Laughter] So, to me, in thinking
about the policy framework, a lot of the important issues come up, as you said, Madam Chair,
concerning LSAPs, liquidity insurance, and, obviously, stigma, and I’m not discounting those,
but I do think that the effective lower bound is the thing that worries me.
And I do want to bring up an issue that the Vice Chairman and others brought up, and
that’s the issue of the legal restrictions on our ability to conduct monetary policy. I’m thinking
about the types of assets we can buy, whether we can pay negative interest rates, Federal Reserve
bills—I was scribbling these down while people were speaking—the various tools that we will
have in the future to basically achieve our dual-mandate goals. And I recognize that these are
legal restrictions. Even interest on reserves is a legal restriction. But I do think that if we come
to the conclusion that we need more powerful monetary policy tools or that we need to be able to
use Federal Reserve bills or pay interest to a broader set of institutions, we should, when we
come to that view, try our best to convince elected officials that those are the tools that we need.
Now, I know we can’t control that, but I do think that should be part of our discussion. I don’t
July 26–27, 2016
39 of 283
think we should have discussions only about what can we do under the current law, but we
should think seriously about, well, if we could have additional tools, what they would be.
The last comment is that—and I don’t mean to take up so much time, I apologize for
that—I do wonder about stigma. Stigma in this conversation today sounds a little bit like toobig-to-fail. We’re all against it, but it’s actually an equilibrium outcome, right? It’s not about
who’s causing the stigma. It’s us, right? We’re the central bank, and the policies that we set and
the decisions we make are what cause banks not to want to come to the discount window. So in
thinking about stigma, I think we have to go back to what I understand the fundamental issues is:
Do we think there is value in telling financial institutions that you should be getting your funding
from the markets instead of coming to the central bank, or do we think that, no, in fact, we want
the central bank to be your source of funding on a regular basis? And I know I’m being very
loose in how I talk about that, but I do remember 2007. When we said, “The discount window is
open, and come,” and no one came, I think the issue was really about the fact that banks
understood that you weren’t supposed to come to the discount window unless you were in
trouble. And so I think that when we say we want to reduce stigma, we might look maybe a little
more inwardly and think harder about why it is that we developed that situation in the first place.
CHAIR YELLEN. Well, I think we had tried to change that through policy changes
made before the crisis to reduce the stigma and make it an effective ceiling, but I agree with your
point. We hadn’t been successful before that, and that continued to prevail during the crisis.
MR. WILLIAMS. I agree with what you just said, but I remember in 2007, with thenChairman Bernanke, it was almost like we had an announcement, along with balloons and free
hot dogs and soda pop, saying, “Come to the discount window. We’re open for business,” right?
And then everyone said, “Not so much.” And the TAF, I think, was, in a way, successful in
July 26–27, 2016
40 of 283
creating a different structure that somehow removed the stigma. So I’m just bringing out the
issue that stigma seems to be something about which you can’t just say, “I want there to be no
stigma.” You have to think about where the stigma came from. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Madam Chair. I’ll start by also complimenting the staff for
their considerable effort and having a wide range of researchers engaged in the project. I found
that really useful. These memos provide a lot of useful material, particularly the money market
field research. I think no matter what we do, the research that’s being done on this is going to be
of lasting value for the System.
A little side comment on “stigma” before we go on—I agree very much with President
Williams’s observations that it’s an outcome. If you think about wholly private market
transactions, they also are subject to exactly the same thing, that if it’s revealed that Party A
borrows at Rate X, that’s going to convey some information about the situation of Party A. We
had Citigroup paying exorbitant amounts to raise additional capital in 2008, and that reveals
something to the markets about just how dire the situation was at Citi, and I think that’s
unavoidable. It’s part of the market outcome. And the lesson that yields for me is that we are
going to have to accommodate ourselves to some amount of stigma.
I approached this general subject of the long-range framework with a leaning toward, as I
said before, a simple, straightforward floor system, in which the interest rate on reserves is our
sole policy instrument. And we supply just enough reserves to satiate the banking system with a
fair, high degree of profitability and eschew targeting the federal funds rate or intervening in the
RP market. Now, I’m looking forward to the staff’s future work on this, and, as the Vice
Chairman implored us, I’m retaining an open mind. [Laughter] I’m open to persuasion. But
July 26–27, 2016
41 of 283
what I’ve learned so far tilts me toward that preference. Beyond my preference about this, I
think that that simple regime is a useful benchmark, and I think the way to approach the analysis
of this is to take that and then view any other framework as that plus some stuff. And I’ll get
back to this.
At a broad level, what I take away from this is that there are a wide range of
considerations in money markets that affect market outcomes—the observed trading volumes
and prices for various money market instruments. The memos do a good job of documenting the
array of regulatory factors. I thought that was really useful, sort of a missing element in the
overnight RRP discussions we had. I think we had a sense that they were broad and pervasive
and complicated, and I think that’s the picture that emerges.
In addition, I was struck by the extent to which relationship considerations seem to affect
many money market transactions, and I’m not sure I suspected they’d be as pervasive as they are.
Apparently, there are some money market funding deals that are bundled together with other
financial transactions and occur between parties that establish a relationship and continue it for
some time. So there must be some economies of scope across financial transactions or maybe
some fixed costs associated with establishing a relationship. Well, in those cases, the observed
transactions don’t represent arm’s-length Walrasian spot trades that are popular in our models, so
it’s not obvious to me what it means to target a rate in a market governed by sort of relationship
trades like that or whether it’s advisable.
I was also struck by the importance of counterparty credit risk. In some markets,
sometimes credit risk premiums are negligible or relatively stable outside of crisis periods, but
some premiums arguably have been quite relevant to the federal funds market because there’s
always been a noticeable dispersion of observed transaction rates. To me, this makes it tricky to
July 26–27, 2016
42 of 283
think about targeting something like the average interest rate on federal funds when so many of
the transactions build in some tiering or differential, what you’d interpret as credit risk
premiums. When counterparty credit risk premiums rise across a broad range of counterparties
in that market, which arguably happened in August 2007, then you’d expect the credit risk
premiums to rise, right? And if risk-free rates don’t change, then the funds rate will rise. If we
target the funds rate, if we feel as if we have to hold that constant, then we in essence have to
lower what’s essentially the risk-free rate. Now, we often do find it appropriate to cut our policy
rate at times when credit risk premiums go up, but it’s not obvious that should be automatically
one-for-one, and that’s sort of what we imposed on the Desk in August 2007. We were sort of
cracking the whip, asking them to keep the average funds rate constant.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. I remember that. [Laughter]
MR. LACKER. Yes, you do. You were sitting right over there, getting some heat from
the Committee about that in September. And yet the situation was that we had these risk
premiums rising, and so you had to drive down what was, in essence, the risk-free rate. So if we
worked with an administered rate, then risk premiums do what they do and we make an explicit
decision about how much to offset that with a move in the risk-free rate. So, for me, as I said,
just the welter of factors that affect various spreads and money markets make the simplicity of
adopting an administered rate pretty attractive. They also make me dubious about targeting any
particular market rate or aiming our operations at any particular money market beyond this
administered rate we have.
We have some experience now away from the lower bound. It seems pretty clear that
arbitrage among various parties does make the interest rate on excess reserves an effective
anchor for other market rates. I think the interviews with money market participants confirm
July 26–27, 2016
43 of 283
that. If we just relied on our administered rate, we’d avoid the dependence on the funds market,
which could dwindle to nothing pretty rapidly. We could avoid the cost of overnight RRP
operations and sort of footprint concerns we’ve had. The information in the staff memos
suggests those are superfluous to the degree to which IOER is acting as an effective market
anchor already. In addition, with a floor system and a large enough balance sheet to satiate
reserves, overnight and intraday lending by us would be fairly minimal. Daylight credit use
would be fairly minimal, another advantage I think we need to count.
Now, as I said, I prefer that regime, but I’ll just say that I think if the staff brings back a
recommendation for anything else, I think the burden of proof should be on demonstrating that
going beyond that simple regime has some benefits. Another way to put that as a question for
the staff would be: What would be wrong with that regime? If we had money market rates
configured the way they are, with us just running a simple IOER-based administered rate system,
what would be wrong with the funds rate trading we’d see? What would be wrong with the RP
rate? What would be wrong with money market rates that we’d need to correct by going in and
targeting some other rate? And I guess that’s the way to think about it.
There’s one wrinkle that detracts from a simple IOER-based administered rate regime
that springs to mind. The Congress gave the power to set the interest rate on excess reserves to
the Board of Governors and not to the FOMC—in hindsight, arguably, a blunder. [Laughter] It
might not be the first by the Congress, but—so I’m okay for now with setting the target rate at
the funds rate as an interim arrangement until we can get the Congress to fix the legislation. But
in response to President Williams’s point: I think we shouldn’t be shy about deciding we’re
going to seek some changes. In the meantime, this is sort of a messy aspect of the current
framework because we really don’t care about the funds market per se, which is the point our
July 26–27, 2016
44 of 283
Vice Chairman made. But having an announced target for the funds rate kind of makes it seem
like we do, and it’s an awkward aspect to the current regime, as I see it. So in their analysis of
alternative frameworks, I’d urge the staff to be candid about governance questions as they bring
back their work to us.
Let me talk about “liquidity programs,” as they’re called. One memo asks whether the
framework should be designed to mitigate the tension between interest rate control and liquidity
provision objectives. As I highlighted in response to President Bullard, in a simple floor system
relying on just the interest rate on reserves, there is no tension between our monetary policy
framework and liquidity programs. In fact, one of our former Federal Reserve Bank of
Philadelphia colleagues used to oppose floor systems for exactly this reason, because they
facilitated credit-market interventions. In case you were wondering, I can assure you that the
ease of undertaking credit-market interventions is not the reason I prefer a simple floor system.
[Laughter]
This obviously isn’t the time to debate the merits of the various ways we intervened in
credit markets during the crisis, but if the staff believes that there is a tension or a tradeoff
between the ability to undertake liquidity programs and a monetary policy framework that they’d
recommend, they’re going to have to come to us with some sense of the economic benefits and
costs of such credit programs, and they haven’t done this in the materials they provide. In fact,
the memo on lessons from the crisis simply takes as an unquestioned premise that various credit
market interventions were necessary. They’re referred to as things we had to do in this situation.
This is consistent with some popular narratives that emphasize the inherent dysfunctionality in
financial markets, but, as David Altig noted at the beginning of his remarks, scholars differ on
the interpretation of the events of the crisis. I’m not aware of any economic analysis comparing
July 26–27, 2016
45 of 283
this popular narrative with alternatives, including ones that emphasize the extent to which
volatility and distress in financial markets in that period were induced by the moral hazard
effects of the perceived Federal Reserve stance toward credit provisions, particularly following
the August 2007 actions that President Williams so vividly described. We haven’t conducted
such an evaluation internally, and I’m not aware of any credible external assessment. And
without such a comparative assessment, I think the necessity of the sequence of credit market
interventions we undertook in the crisis is far from obvious. So if the staff believes that the
merits of liquidity program capability should be taken into account in monetary framework
design, it would seem essential that they take the time to conduct an after-action assessment of
our policy choices before, during, and after the crisis, even if that means putting the next phase
of the work on the long-run framework on hold. In my view, this type of assessment is long
overdue. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Mester.
MS. MESTER. Thank you, Madam Chair. Let me start by also adding my sincere
thanks to the Federal Reserve System staff for their leadership, insights, and sheer hard work on
the implementation framework project. I view the design of the project as focusing on the
longer-run framework first, and then, presumably, we’ll consider the appropriate transition path
to that framework. Also, as Governor Fischer suggested, we’ll need to really think about how
we address times that are not normal, or crisis periods.
We’re going to have this further Committee discussion focusing on framework specifics
in November, so I thought today I would just provide four questions I think the Committee
participants will need to consider in evaluating specifics.
July 26–27, 2016
46 of 283
First, how much volatility are we comfortable in tolerating for the policy instrument
we’re targeting in normal times and then in times of stress? Presumably, this is going to be one
of the considerations in our preference for choosing an administered rate versus a market rate.
And if the choice is a market rate, which market rate? President Lacker, I take your discussion
as very interesting about the administered rate avoiding some of the problems. But, presumably,
it’s the correlation between that rate and other market rates that is going to matter for what we’re
doing. I think we still have to understand how the money markets are going to be affected by our
choices.
I think our control of some interest rates may be different from the way it was in the past
because of the structural and regulatory changes that occurred since the crisis, and I think the
memos lay out some of those changes quite well. The bottom line is, I think we have to be
focused on: How much does our control of certain interest rates imply for macro and financial
stability? I think that’s something that we need to think about. In crisis times, we may be
willing to allow for more volatility, but what about periods when we don’t necessarily realize
we’re at the beginning of a crisis? I guess I view the case of 2007 and early 2008 as one in
which it wasn’t necessarily clear at the time that the situation would develop into the crisis
proportions that we saw ex post. A lot of this is in hindsight. But when you’re actually in the
moment, I think those tradeoffs between control and liquidity provision loomed large, but we
didn’t necessarily know how things would turn out.
Second, how should the governance issues and political economy issues be resolved?
And a couple of the commenters have mentioned these. The interest rate on excess reserves is
set by the Board of Governors. Monetary policy decisions lie with the FOMC. So far, in the
post-crisis world, we’ve resolved this tension by still using the federal funds rate as our way of
July 26–27, 2016
47 of 283
communicating about monetary policy. If we communicate with a market rate, presumably this
helps resolve the issue. The ON RRP rate also resolves the issue, because it’s an FOMC
decision. I think these kinds of issues also affect the size of the balance sheet we want to operate
with. It does have implications for our relationship with the fiscal authority and perhaps a
relationship of rates, like the ON RRP versus the IOER has “appearance” complications if we are
going to be paying banks. I think we have to take those kinds of political economy and
governance issues head on, and they should factor into our decisions about the long-run
framework.
Third, what’s our preference about the tradeoff between a framework that is complex
enough to handle many possible contingencies versus one that’s similar and presumably less
costly that works well in normal times but would need to be augmented in unusual times? This
is related to but somewhat different, I think, from the staff memo’s definition of robust and
flexible frameworks. The staff defines a robust framework as one that can provide sufficient
liquidity outside of the U.S. banking system at times of market stress, and a flexible framework
is one that can be adapted to handle evolving market conditions. I have to say, my own
preference is for a simpler framework that can be augmented with supplemental tools in times of
crisis. But this simpler framework would need to have aspects of both robustness and flexibility.
In other words, the simpler framework is not likely to be the same one we used before the crisis.
In particular, because of the possibility that the equilibrium interest rate will remain lower than it
was before the crisis and the probability of returning to the effective lower bound on the policy
rate, which has probably increased, we should have a standard approach to providing more
accommodation once the effective lower bound has been reached. And I do think we’re going to
have to deal with the changes that occurred in money markets, although I understand that our
July 26–27, 2016
48 of 283
choice of framework then could feed back on some of those changes. So I think we need to
really understand some of those issues, and the memo has pointed out quite well the kinds of
issues we need to be thinking about.
I think that the Desk has undertaken a useful step in expanding counterparties, but
expanding the types of institutions to which we routinely provide liquidity directly could have its
own effect on the evolution of financial market structure, as pointed out by Vice Chairman
Dudley. It could raise moral hazard problems, and we need to understand those better. And, of
course, we’re going to also have to think about operational readiness. Presumably, even if we
decide that our standard framework isn’t going to include a lot of these liquidity facilities or
credit facilities or what have you, we’re going to have to maintain expertise in that. So I would
welcome further discussion on the tradeoff between simpler versus complex frameworks.
Finally, fourth, which framework design can best maintain the Federal Reserve’s longstanding desire to avoid allocating credit to particular market segments and displacing privatesector financial markets? Maybe I’m channeling my former colleague from the Federal Reserve
Bank of Philadelphia, that an operating framework that puts no limit on the size of the balance
sheet might make the Federal Reserve more vulnerable to political pressures that at times would
be exerted to get the Federal Reserve to use the balance sheet to support certain markets. And it
also might lead to more structural changes in the financial markets that we are going to have to
think about deeply as part of the discussion.
There are lot of interrelated considerations. I look forward to our discussion in
November, and let me, once again, thank the staffs of the Reserve Banks and the Board of
Governors for their efforts. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Rosengren.
July 26–27, 2016
49 of 283
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Madam Chair. I, too, would like to thank the staff for
the thought-provoking memos on a long-run framework. I would say the comments that have
already been made around the table were more wide ranging than I was expecting, and that’s a
very positive attribute.
I want to consider several assumptions that I believe are important in considering the
long-run framework. The first is whether periods when the federal funds rate reaches its lower
bound because of significant slack in the economy will be anomalous or a more common feature
of a low inflation environment. My view is that, as long as we have a low inflation target and a
low equilibrium real interest rate, a funds rate at or near its bound will become a regular feature
of business cycles. This conclusion echoes comments by President Williams. It’s been seven
years since the end of the recession, and we have raised rates only once. Moreover, we have yet
to shrink our balance sheet. Because few recoveries last a decade, it is quite likely that when the
next recession occurs, we will still have a large balance sheet and limited room to reduce the
federal funds rate before reaching its lower bound. One way to reduce the frequency with which
we hit the effective lower bound would be to raise the inflation target. At the time that we set a 2
percent target, few of us would have predicted how many advanced economies would be facing
long spells of negative rates, large balance sheets, and inflation rates below target. We should
have a thorough discussion of the long-run implications of central banks around the world setting
inflation targets that may result in the policy rate too often pinned at its lower bound. I hope we
have such an open discussion at the end of the year and that we revisit the inflation goal on a
regular basis—perhaps every five years, as the Bank of Canada does. If it seems likely we
choose to maintain a 2 percent inflation target, then we should choose a long-run framework that
July 26–27, 2016
50 of 283
anticipates the federal funds rate regularly hitting its bound during recessions and allows us to
respond flexibly in a manner that best achieves our dual-mandate goals.
If the funds rate regularly hits zero during future recessions, my second concern is
whether we will augment conventional policy with quantitative easing or with negative interest
rates. I would prefer expanding the balance sheet and possibly the composition of the balance
sheet before resorting to negative interest rates. The early assessment of the costs and efficacy of
negative interest rates is quite mixed. Most central banks that have gone negative have taken
actions to help insulate banks from some of the collateral effects from that policy. In light of the
concern about bailouts of banks in the United States, it’s unlikely that policies that insulate banks
will be politically feasible in the United States. I think it would be useful to have a fuller
discussion of negative interest rates and whether it’s likely to be employed as a policy response
to future recessions.
Given our reluctance to raise the inflation target, expanded balance sheets are likely to be
a regular feature of recessions. Thus, any policy we adopt should flexibly incorporate the need
to expand the balance sheet and to change both the duration and composition of holdings. I
agree with President Williams that we should consider asking for a broader set of assets that can
be held, along lines similar to the practice of other central banks.
If an expanded balance sheet is a regular feature of future policy, we may want to expand
our thinking on how we use our balance sheet. For example, if we decide that supervisory
policies are unlikely to be effective for addressing bubbles in real estate, we may want to more
actively consider whether to use our balance sheet to address such situations. In the face of
rising real estate leverage and prices, we might choose to raise rates in this sector by shortening
the duration of our holdings and selling some of our MBS. Of course, for this financial stability
July 26–27, 2016
51 of 283
tool to be possible, we would need to hold long-duration assets and MBS. Thus, I would not
assume that in the future we will have a small balance sheet that is limited to short-duration
Treasury securities.
Many of us now assume that the equilibrium federal funds rate will be around 3 percent.
Historically, we have reduced interest rates more than 3 percentage points in response to most
recessions. Of course, in those instances, we did not hit the effective lower bound because
inflation and the real equilibrium rate were higher. But, for the future, we should assume that we
will likely hit the effective lower bound, that we will resort to some balance sheet expansion,
and, thus, we will need to control short-term interest rates for the foreseeable future and during
most recessions. I, somewhat surprisingly, agree with President Lacker on one issue. I would
prefer to focus on the IOER, an administered rate, but I also agree that that rate should be an
FOMC decision.
Finally, the staff should continue to explore how to be flexible in a situation of a
changing structure of our financial system. In particular, the platforms of both political parties
are calling for readopting Glass-Steagall restrictions. If that were to occur, we would once again
have large standalone broker-dealers that would likely be viewed as SIFIs regulated by the
Federal Reserve. Having large standalone broker-dealers implies a greater likelihood of runs on
them and calls into question whether the financing system can remain as dependent on
repurchase agreements.
Second, we are requiring financial institutions to be more liquid, and justifiably so.
However, there are limited quantities of high-quality liquid assets. Better understanding how our
supervisory actions, in trying to increase liquidity in financial institutions, affect demand for
short-term money market instruments would be useful.
July 26–27, 2016
52 of 283
Third, broker-dealers tend to be highly sensitive to economic conditions. Many of the
European banks with large broker-dealers operate in the United States and remain troubled to
this day. The continued dependence on broker-dealers as counterparties raises the issue of
whether the discount window should be available to them to address liquidity issues or whether a
more substantive change in their funding model is in order.
Fourth, the money market fund industry continues to evolve. This has implications for
financial institutions’ ready access to market for short-term liabilities. With the incentives to
shift to government-only funds, the demand for high-quality liquid assets will increase further.
The issues raised by the staff were very useful. However, I would like to see us and the
staff spend more time discussing some of these key issues.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Kaplan.
MR. KAPLAN. Thank you, Madam Chair. Thank you to the team around the System
that worked on this project. Let me just make a couple of comments that struck me after reading
through the papers, understanding these are early days.
Regulatory reform, I think, has certainly reduced the probability of financial crises and
limited their potential severity. However, it also probably has reduced incentives for arbitrage in
money markets and may introduce some frictions that make money markets work less smoothly,
therefore possibly increasing the need for liquidity actions by the Federal Reserve. A
combination of on-the-shelf liquidity facilities and the ON RRP may be needed to ensure future
money market functionality and interest rate control in a potential future crisis. So far, the ON
RRP facility has helped limit shortfalls and volatility in money markets, and the risk that it might
have exacerbated flights to quality really has not materialized. For example, we didn’t see it in
January and February of this year, and we haven’t seen it following the Brexit vote.
July 26–27, 2016
53 of 283
Nevertheless, because crises can hit at unexpected times and in unexpected ways—and, by
definition, are surprises that you don’t expect—I do feel strongly that we should do more work
on having on-the-shelf liquidity facilities that could help limit the severity of market stress
episodes and help address one potential downside of an ON RRP facility. In my view, in that
crisis it may well be necessary to assist, in particular, the money market industry, dealers, and
nonbank financials.
On slide 13 of the briefing materials, the points 2 and 3 that you made are, to me, a
couple of the reasons why I would like to have on-the-shelf facilities. Number one, I think if
there’s clarity about the purpose of such operations, it does reduce stigma. And, in particular,
it’s important to emphasize that this is about the provision of liquidity versus emergency lending
to individual firms. I believe that if our communications are well prepared and explain what
those facilities are designed for, we won’t eliminate stigma but should help reduce it. Also, your
point about clarity on when liquidity insurance operations would be used—to limit contagion
during stress events—is a very key one and is another reason to have on-the-shelf facilities.
I would add two other reasons for having on-the-shelf facilities. One, it allows you to
move quickly, and, two, when you are in a crisis is not the time to be thinking through and
making up provisions and mechanisms to deal with the situation. That is, I’d rather we did this
in advance in the cold light of day rather than on the run. And I think we have the opportunity to
do that, so I would encourage you to do more work on this. I understand the risk that it may
appear to create or induce an overreliance on the Fed, and there are some political sensitivities
associated with that. But this work is very, very important, and I think history has shown that we
ought to have these facilities in place with our communication well established in advance. So I
encourage you to do more work on this. Thank you.
July 26–27, 2016
54 of 283
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you very much. President Evans.
MR. EVANS. Thank you, Madam Chair. I’d like to thank all of the contributors to the
long-run framework working groups who presented here today. The first installment has been an
impressive effort, and I learned a lot from reading the memos and discussing them with my staff.
The presentations clearly point to a number of tradeoffs that will be associated with choosing
among alternative implementation structures.
Before I forget, I agree with the comments that President Williams and President
Rosengren made, that the implications of the probability of hitting the effective lower bound
should be considered within the context of our long-run framework discussions. I think it is
certainly the case that the choice of our inflation objective is part of that, in terms of how low
interest rates will be during normal times and how much capacity we have to lower rates when
we need to do so.
I’d like to say at this point that I remain open minded, no matter what I say after this.
[Laughter] I am not strongly wed to many prior views on the long-run framework, and it’s
simply useful for each of us to push, in our own way, harder on all of the framework
presentations. So, in that spirit, I will continue.
I’m not sure this isn’t just nostalgia for the old days, but I do confess some sympathies
for returning to our pre-crisis framework with a small balance sheet, or at least a smaller balance
sheet than we have. At least during normal times, it served us well and in ways that we probably
still don’t fully appreciate, at least I think when it comes to minimizing political risks that we
previously never considered.
A fundamental question for me is this: Do the changes in financial markets that we have
experienced over the past several years make it clearly undesirable to return to the “old world”?
July 26–27, 2016
55 of 283
I’ll describe it that way. I appreciate that there are numerous details that complicate this return to
a more conservative, old-style monetary approach. For example, we will have to determine if
changes in regulation and business practices have had a lasting and unalterable effect on reserve
demand and overnight funding markets in general. And, in turn, there are many interactions and
interdependencies involved in analyzing this and other important questions. I’m looking forward
to hearing more about the strengths and weaknesses across alternative frameworks, both during
normal times and during periods of stress. Our ability to achieve our set of macroeconomic
outcomes is the most important piece of this decision tree, it seems to me. Maybe it’s the easiest.
The social benefits of reducing deadweight losses in some markets might be more uncertain and
controversial with respect to possible unexpected outcomes that I just can’t lay out today,
because I don’t know that we know them.
Again, here is that caveat. I remain open minded, but I am wondering about the
following risk. It’s not just the economics that are difficult. The decisions that we make about
the implementation framework will be scrutinized from a political economy perspective as well,
and I think President Mester touched on a number of these issues. Inevitably, we will need to
consider the possibility that not all of our tools will be available in the future.
Madam Chair, you mentioned that there are already “optics” concerns related to the
IOER rate being above a market rate. The Congress has wondered whether that is something of
a subsidy to certain financial institutions. For example, large IOER payments to banks may not
always be seen as “living the Friedman rule” and reducing regulatory reserve burdens. I worry
about the possibility that, when rates increase and get closer to neutral, when we finally do
normalize, if we still have a large balance sheet, the size of IOER payments going out to banks
may become a political lightning rod. Should we select a best framework or most robust
July 26–27, 2016
56 of 283
framework, subject to achieving a number of objectives that we specify? I look forward to
hearing more about this. Our previous small-balance-sheet approach may seem 20th century,
“old school,” and opaque. But I wonder if those tools and authorities might be more robust to
changes in political winds. I’m just wondering.
I appreciate the long-run framework project’s commitment to a broad, open, and robust
process that considers the issues from many vantage points. It will help us understand important
tradeoffs and move us toward adopting an implementation framework that will serve the
institution well in years to come. I expect to learn more, and I remain open minded about
selecting the best appropriate framework for the years ahead. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Madam Chair. I, too, would like to add my thanks to the
workgroups’ very thorough work products for today’s discussion.
While I think the framework in place today seems to be working well for monetary
control purposes, I do support this effort devoting time and resources to thinking ahead,
exploring options, and, importantly, anticipating various states of the world in which the
Committee might be making policy. I do think we have time to do this exercise in a very
deliberate way. I don’t have a lean yet. I’m processing the information in the memos at a
somewhat more basic point of consideration. I found the three memos helpful in teasing out
what seemed to me to be the first-order pertinent questions. Some of my questions may suggest
further work and attention, so here’s what’s on my mind, informed by the memos.
Realistically, can we get back to a corridor system and preserve the federal funds rate as a
centerpiece of policy setting? Will reserves be scarce or plentiful down the road? If we take as a
July 26–27, 2016
57 of 283
given the fact that depository institutions will want to hold a higher level of reserves, will their
target level reserves vary with changing conditions? And, if so, how?
Will the expanded number of counterparties that we now have be a permanent aspect of
the operating framework? And if we were to go further, what classes of institutions would we
want to include? What are the benefits and negatives of expanding the range of collateral
instruments?
If we want to preserve a market rate as the policy rate, how viable is the federal funds
rate as a policy instrument? Are the overnight interbank funding rate, which is an unsecured
instrument, and/or the GC repo rate, a secured instrument, workable alternatives as a market
rate? And do these rates require expanding the number of counterparties? More generally, what
distinguishes one money market rate from another as a potential policy rate?
Regarding arbitrage behavior, what can be assumed to be reliable on an ongoing basis?
I’d like to understand better what incentives and disincentives are associated with regulation as
they affect arbitrage opportunities.
And, finally, a broader question is suggested by commentary that comes on pages 9 and
10 of the memo “Lessons from the Crisis”: What conclusions can we draw regarding the features
of the U.S. environment that will shape implementation practices? I think we might gain from an
attempt to work back from the environment or the context of policy to the operating framework
options and choices. We tend to think of environment features in terms of the structure of money
markets and the regulatory picture. As others have raised, including President Evans just before
me, I’ll suggest that we might also think about the political support for operating in different
ways. As I see it, there is likely to be political pressure on the IOER rate as an instrument. I’d
like also to suggest that, as we move this exercise forward, thought be given at some point to the
July 26–27, 2016
58 of 283
requirements of transition from the current regime to another and to the communications
challenges involved.
Finally, while these were prepared in advance, I will freelance for just one moment,
perhaps responding to Governor Fischer and something that President Williams said, about our
regime that will probably work in normal times, with many different versions of it. But I think
the times also call for perhaps thinking well outside the box. So to borrow from a different
discipline—maybe a little bit of a “Herman Kahn” approach to thinking about the unthinkable—
we’re in an era in which it’s not unthinkable that a terrorist act or cyberwarfare could severely
affect the operating environment of the Federal Reserve. So I would encourage some work on
thinking about scenarios that are really extreme and how we would respond to those scenarios.
Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Thank you, Madam Chair. I’m going to begin with a procedural point,
which picks up on some of the things John said earlier. I think we have to find a way to explore
a variety of ideas here, some of which may be pretty innovative and some of which may be
pretty far reaching, without committing anybody ex ante to any particular direction. I think it is
hard to do that in this room because discussions here have a tendency to either acquire a certain
direction or acquire a certain oppositional quality whereby it seems as though something is being
debated. And, like President Williams, I see neither the need nor the desirability of rushing to
some sort of answer. I think that we’re going to need to figure out a way to have an exploration
of both a lot of the substantive issues people have raised as well as a blue-skying of ideas that
takes place outside this room but in a way that is accessible to people in the room who are
currently in the room and who may be able to participate. This can happen through the Jackson
July 26–27, 2016
59 of 283
Hole symposium and other conferences. It might be able to happen informally. But I do think
that’s important, because we don’t want to force the staff to either come back only with
incremental ideas because they feel it’s not their place to change things fundamentally or to force
them to come back with something that’s quite far-reaching, and then for us to say, “Who are
you guys to be coming to us with something far reaching like this?” So some sort of iterative
process in between, I think, is actually important.
Let me now just identify, as a number of other people have, some of the issues that I
think are particularly useful, interesting, or important, or all three, to pursue during this process.
At the very top of that list I will echo Presidents Evans, Rosengren, and Williams in saying that
how to think about accommodation in a low-for-long environment is, I think, essential to this
exercise, and if it doesn’t address that question, it probably hasn’t succeeded. Other things I’m
going to mention now I think are important, but without that first element, it’s a little hard to see
why we would have gone through the whole thing to being with.
Next, I would say, how to adjust monetary policy to the better regulation of financial
institutions and activities that have been put in place since the crisis is actually very important.
And in this respect, I would recommend—I know the staff knows about it, because they’ve read
it—to the Committee generally a paper on monetary policy and regulation put out, I think, Vice
Chairman Dudley, was it a year ago May, by the Committee on the Global Financial System?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Yes.
MR. TARULLO. I think it was put out in May 2015. Is that when it was?
MR. POTTER. Yes, last year—“Regulatory Change and Monetary Policy,” paper
number 54.
July 26–27, 2016
60 of 283
MR. TARULLO. Yes. It was, I thought, a very nuanced assessment of how the
necessary changes in regulation will need to be accommodated by monetary policies throughout
the world, and it was done principally by people from the monetary policy side of shops. It
wasn’t done by regulators, which I think is one of the things that made it useful. Now, we were
lucky that our participant was someone from the Division of Monetary Affairs, but someone who
knew a lot about regulation, and I think other central banks were able to do the same, which is
why it has a nuanced feel to it. In that regard, I would note that the maximum lubrication of the
policy transmission system that monetary policy people sometimes talk about as desirable is
actually, if not quite the same thing, very close to the same thing as the massive amounts of
short-term wholesale funding that support unexamined credit positions and runs at the first real
signs of trouble.
That’s why the regulation and monetary policy decisions need to be thought of at the
same time. You can’t just think, “Well, we want maximum transmission so that we can get
monetary policy through in these very liquid markets” without realizing that it’s those very liquid
markets that freeze up when things start to go awry, which leads me to the concept of “liquidity
insurance.” I know that is not a term coined by the staff, but it is a pregnant term, which
immediately elicited in me the question, “And who exactly is paying the premiums for that
liquidity insurance?” And the answer, of course, is not really anybody in some of the countries
that the staff was referring to, except insofar as you accept the proposition that being part of a
regulatory system is in and of itself a premium, a case pretty hard to make on the basis of the
existing state of the financial system. I would note in this regard that the United Kingdom and
Switzerland, the two countries correctly cited as having some of the more fulsome liquidity
facilities, are also two of the jurisdictions that have what we might term “unusually large”
July 26–27, 2016
61 of 283
financial systems, given their GDPs. And I think it’s difficult to avoid the conclusion that it is
necessary for the central bank to be a very generous lender of last resort in order to sustain what
some might characterize as outsized financial systems. This leads to some of the questions that
Vice Chairman Dudley was suggesting a moment ago as well about our own financial system,
which, although it’s not as outsized relative to our GDP as is the case in either the United
Kingdom or certainly the old Switzerland, is still pretty outsized in comparison with the rest of
the world. And that does get us thinking, as Vice Chairman Dudley said, about the layers of
intermediation that take place, but also the kind of things that we want to be backing up, as it
were.
Now, I actually was a bit bemused by President Lacker’s suggestion that it was moral
hazard that created the problems during the crisis. I would very much agree with the proposition
that moral hazard in the years preceding the crisis led to the conditions that created all of these
runs. Personally, I subscribe to the view that when you’re in the middle of a crisis is not the time
to create bulwarks against moral hazard. That’s what you do when things have calmed down.
But that is something that we need to be thinking about. And it’s the reason why I have been
more skeptical than a lot of you—although, judging by today, I have more allies than I might
have feared, and I’m glad to hear that—about always wanting more powers in the central banks
to be able to create liquidity, because there is a time-consistency problem that is created when
you have those powers, and that’s why it’s a difficult set of issues.
That pushes me to the existence, size, and use of the balance sheet, which I think is in the
first instance an analytic question. That is, there’s a positive analysis to be done before the
normative analysis comes through. I was in Cambridge, Massachusetts, a week ago Friday and
had this very interesting experience in which I had breakfast at Harvard University and lunch at
July 26–27, 2016
62 of 283
MIT. And so at Harvard University, led by Jeremy Stein, as many of you would have guessed, I
very much got the demand for safe assets: “You know, they’re being privately created right
now, so the Federal Reserve should think about creating public safe assets” and all the rest—the
full dose of that. And then a mere two stops down the Red Line, in Kendall Square, I got the
exact opposite view, which is, “It is a very dangerous thing for the central bank to be creating
safe assets. Moreover, a lot of the so-called demand for safe assets will actually dissipate.” If
they could meet in Central Square and have the debate, that would be fun to watch. But,
analytically, I do think we need to pay attention to that issue because whatever our normative
predispositions, if there is, indeed, a substantial exogenous demand for money like our safe
assets that is going to be privately created, we have to take that into account not just for
regulatory purposes, but also when thinking about the transmission of monetary policy. And if
we come to that analytic conclusion, we may or may not decide that we want to do something
with the balance sheet, as Jeremy Stein would have us do to create safe assets, but we at least
need to take that into account. And then as President Rosengren said—so I won’t repeat it at any
length—it’s conceivable that you’d also use the balance sheet for monetary policy purposes, with
a sort of twist–reverse twist kind of mechanism. I think that’s worth exploring as well.
And finally, an issue that I don’t think anyone has mentioned to this point is that I do
think it’s worth paying some attention to the unique role of the dollar in the global economy and
thinking about how we fashion our monetary policy framework. It occurred to me in the first
instance as I was reading the memo on foreign central bank frameworks. And I said, “Wait a
second. This is very interesting, but, man, oh, man, this would not work for us, because you’ve
got people holding dollar assets as currency reserves all around the world.” So I do think it
would be worth specifically addressing the question of the degree to which the role of the dollar
July 26–27, 2016
63 of 283
as the principal global reserve currency both affects us in the effectiveness of monetary policy
decisions that we would make—this is back to global savings kinds of issues—and, in turn,
affects other people, which has a kind of feedback effect on the performance of the
macroeconomy. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Kashkari.
MR. KASHKARI. Thank you, Madam Chair. I’ll just make four quick points. First, let
me add my voice to all those who came before in encouraging the staff to do work looking at the
effective lower bound. I think that’s paramount, as others have said. I know you were planning
to do it anyway, but I think it’s important.
Second, I’m interested in the staff’s view on some of these on-the-shelf or off-the-shelf
tools. How often would you expect that we would use them? To me this goes right to the core
of both stigma and moral hazard. I view stigma and moral hazard as closely linked. If we have
tools that are used frequently, they’re going to have low stigma and potentially increase moral
hazard. Tools that are used infrequently, the opposite. Would you envision us using these tools
in the ordinary course of events every year, every 10 years, every 100 years? I’m just interested
in getting your perspective on that.
And this is linked to something that Vice Chairman Dudley said, which was, “Would the
crisis have been less severe if we had more of these tools ready to go?” I’m not sure. When I
think back to my experience during the crisis, when people asked me to reflect on our
performance, let’s say, the government entirely—the Federal Reserve, the Treasury, et cetera—
the criticism that I offer is that we were always late because, in connection with Loretta’s point,
we didn’t know how bad the crisis was, and we were reluctant interveners. I’ll give you one
example. Just take the TARP, as the most extreme example. When the Congress passed the
July 26–27, 2016
64 of 283
TARP, it was about two weeks to when we announced the capital injections, and about a month
later we actually had money going into banks. But it had been sitting on the shelf as a concept
for eight months until Bernanke and Paulson said, “Now we finally have to go to the Congress.”
So the delay was not the implementation. The biggest delay was us having the will to say “We
need to do this.” So it affects, for me, how I think about tools on the shelf. Is it the time to
implement the tool or the time to make the decision to use the tool that ultimately is the delay?
And then the last point I’ll make, because I think we should be humble about our ability
to forecast the future, is that if we had gone back 20 or 30 years ago and asked the Federal
Reserve System to design tools that would have been useful in 2008, there’s no chance they
would have come up with the right set of tools that ended up being implemented in 2008 because
the markets evolved. That tells me that we should err toward simplicity but flexibility to give
future participants the tools they need to design tools in the moment, because we’re probably not
going to be able to design them right now. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Powell.
MR. POWELL. Thank you, Madam Chair. I want to join others in complimenting the
staff on this very interesting set of memos. These are tremendously interesting and important
questions. Of course, for those of us who were here, it takes us back to a set of discussions we
had in 2013 and 2014, which led up to the adoption of those principles in September 2014, which
I’ll come back to in a second. I think we’re in a different situation now. The questions we’re
asking now really don’t need to be answered. It’s a great discussion to have, but I don’t see the
wisdom in driving this to conclusions at this point. I think we have a lot to learn over years to
come and reasons to gain from that experience.
July 26–27, 2016
65 of 283
The Policy Normalization Principles and Plans were published by the Committee in
September 2014, and it’s a reasonably detailed, if not fully worked out, formulation, nor could it
have been fully worked out. I’d say that that framework works pretty well, and, on the basis of
the one rate increase we’ve executed so far, we have decent rate control. But I do think it’s
likely to prove vulnerable over time and not just in times of crisis. The September 2014
principles were wise enough to conclude with the observation that “the Committee is prepared to
adjust the details of its approach to policy normalization in light of economic and financial
developments,” and that is one principle that I suggest it would be wise to honor.
The note on foreign experience does show that other central banks have used a range of
different frameworks to control policy rates: floor and corridor systems, targeting secured and
unsecured rates using administered rates, as well as market rates. So I think we do have plenty
of flexibility in choosing our own long-run framework—and should feel free to pick one that is
tailored to our own institutional setting and that will work in different conditions, particularly at
the effective lower bound, both for administering monetary policy and for providing liquidity.
The arbitrage trade that currently sets the federal funds rate, as we all know, is between
the Federal Home Loan Banks and the foreign banks, essentially, and that trade could easily go
away—for example, if the Federal Home Loan Banks exit the market like Fannie and Freddie did
or if regulation or some other factor makes the trade less profitable for FBOs. More broadly,
unsecured borrowing between financial institutions is in secular decline. So if we were choosing
a reference rate to last for a long time, which happens to be exactly what we’re doing on the
LIBOR project, the federal funds rate would probably fail the fundamental design criterion of
sustainability.
July 26–27, 2016
66 of 283
The money market memo points out that there may be a secular increase in reserve
demand due to heightened liquidity expectations for banks. If that is so, reserves could become
scarcer than expected. I still suspect that scarcity is a very, very long way off. Also, higher
demands for reserves may or may not translate into higher trading volumes in interbank markets.
And let me add that I don’t see higher trading volumes between banks in federal funds as
something that we need to have.
For these reasons, I have growing doubts, actually, that the best long-run solution will be
to return to a corridor system targeting the federal funds rate as set through scarcity trades
between banks. We’ve really been in a floor system for eight years now. It’s, to me, very likely
that it will remain so for some years. That system has worked. Markets are now used to it, and it
may well be that the better long-run approach will be to continue with a floor system, albeit with
a much smaller balance sheet, which can be done if only because markets will have known
nothing else for probably well over a decade. It may also be appropriate to target a secured rate,
as secured borrowing does not appear to be in secular decline, and it involves a much wider set
of participants. The overnight bank funding rate is an unsecured rate that represents a middle
ground and captures a broader range of transactions and counterparties, and it’s an improvement
over the federal funds rate, but it’s still subject to the secular decline in unsecured interbank
borrowing. I will add that I’m also among the open minded when it comes to deciding whether
to choose an administered rate versus a market rate.
Turning to liquidity for a second, the memos show clearly, in my view, that the pre-crisis
toolkit did not contemplate, and was not designed to address, the run dynamics that arose during
the crisis. Policymakers improvised, acted on the fly. And I believe history will judge those
efforts as a success achieved under extremely trying conditions. There is an understandable
July 26–27, 2016
67 of 283
desire to avoid having to live through all of that improvisation again and, in that spirit, to keep
some or all of the crisis liquidity programs close at hand and in working order.
For now, most of the crisis-era liquidity programs have been wound down. One could
think of them as being unplugged and in dry storage, except for the swap lines with the five other
central banks. The memos ask whether these programs should be active parts of the framework
or instead on the shelf. I feel like I have a lot to learn on that and, again, am open minded. I
guess, for the most part, I lean toward the idea of keeping them off the shelf rather than right at
the edge of the game or part of the framework, which might require investing a lot of resources
to keep them operational, but there could be exceptions to that. In particular, I could imagine a
role for the TAF, which would be to provide liquidity to a range of banks in the ordinary course
and over time perhaps reduce the stigma associated with the use of the discount window.
I believe we continue to do a good job over time of explaining and defending our
traditional lender-of-last-resort role—not so much expanding it but sustaining it—and that role
needs to work in the context of financial markets that continue to evolve ever further from the
traditional bank-based model. A wider set of counterparties would provide a more resilient
framework and money market system. As the financial crisis gradually recedes into memory, I
hope that we’ll find more receptive external audiences for that view. I do also recognize the
tradeoff with moral hazard and look forward to hearing more on that.
To wrap up, while this exercise is a worthwhile one, there’s no need to make decisions
that will be better made several years down the road. And there will be a benefit in not making
decisions until we see how markets evolve over time—in particular, adapting to the new
regulatory regime. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Brainard.
July 26–27, 2016
68 of 283
MS. BRAINARD. Thank you, Madam Chair. I appreciate the very high-quality and
voluminous material [laughter] that the staff is developing to help inform these policy
deliberations, and I’m guessing that all of the comments that we’re making today will lead to
even more voluminous material.
I think it’s always tempting as policymakers to hark back to an era of greater simplicity
with fewer tools. But I think it would be a mistake if we succumbed prematurely to that
temptation without carefully assessing the complex nature of the challenges we are facing today
and are likely to face in the future in order to fulfill our statutory responsibilities. I think the
financial markets in particular have evolved considerably and are likely to continue doing so.
The staff’s analysis highlights the role of regulation. And I think this needs to be further
explored. But I also want to make sure that we’re taking into account the role of technology,
which is already affecting the wholesale financial markets and changing market structure and is
likely to do more of that. We certainly saw that in the Treasury securities markets in October
2014, and we’re likely to see more disintermediation and changes in market structure associated
with technology.
I also would highlight, as others have done, that it’s important to take into account the
likelihood that we find ourselves in a lower neutral rate environment for a protracted period of
time. This is an environment in which the same frequency and size of shocks that we have seen
historically would lead us back down to the effective lower bound with greater frequency, which
surely needs to be taken into account in our policy framework, and one in which we might see
greater international transmission than we have previously.
The analysis, to me at least, suggests that the complicated nature of the challenges we’re
likely to face may, in fact, require greater complexity in our implementation framework to
July 26–27, 2016
69 of 283
achieve in the most effective and compelling way the clear objectives the Congress set out for us.
In my own view, it’s very important to think about provision of liquidity in the wholesale
financial markets at times of stress as part of our critical responsibility for financial stability in
parallel to our monetary policy objectives. And I do believe that I would like to see some
explicit consideration of the demand for safe assets and what our role is likely to be or should be
in the future. It seems particularly important for us as the central bank that has the deepest, most
liquid, largest wholesale financial markets in the world and a currency that is viewed globally as
the most important reserve currency. This is not something we chose, it may not be something
we wished for, but it is something that I think matters in terms of our role in the system and the
ways that financial stresses spill over into our markets. So I agree that it should be taken
explicitly into account.
That said, I’m certainly keeping a very open mind, and others around the table, I hear, are
doing the same. I think it’s quite premature to draw any firm conclusions until we’re better able
to assess possible tradeoffs. I do believe that at some juncture we would benefit from a broader
public discussion of these issues—not just with expert communities, but also with nonexpert
communities who may not fully understand the kinds of tradeoffs that we faced during the crisis
and may well face. And it’s better to have those discussions ex ante than to try to defend actions
ex post.
So, against the background of those considerations, I do think this is a very important set
of analyses. And I hope we’ll have a lot of time before we need to actually draw conclusions
about tools and the framework. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Fischer.
July 26–27, 2016
70 of 283
MR. FISCHER. Thank you, Madam Chair. I’m not sure whether I missed something
that Governor Tarullo said, but I heard him talking about the interaction between the need to plan
the system to take account of both the regulatory system that you’re changing and the financial
system. And I think we ought to remind ourselves that we missed that in a big way in 2006, ’07,
and ’08, when the supervisory system did not carry out the functions as well as it should have,
and that those two elements of our job as the central bank, which are supervision and regulation
of the financial system and the provision of a lender-of-last-resort facility, are very intimately
connected. They are connected in the sense that any intelligent human being faced with the
choice between creating a recession of the depth that we had in 2008 to prevent moral hazard on
some future occasion—which it wouldn’t do anyway, because the people who created that crisis
won’t be around for the next one—will, in the end, succumb to what we call “moral hazard”—
and what I call “common sense”—namely, that you don’t destroy an economy for the next five
years in order to teach somebody a lesson.
So we will not get to that point, and that means we have to make sure that through all the
tools that we have at our command, we minimize the probability of being put in such a situation.
But we should never believe that we understand the world and the random events that happen
well enough that our successors will not be put in that situation again. We’re not going to end
too-big-to-fail, and we need to take that into account. We just have to make absolutely sure that
we have done everything that we can to minimize the probability that we are put in that situation
at some future date. And I think that has to be part of the discussions. I think several people
have already said they would like those issues discussed in the next round of this very, very
critical discussion. Thank you, Madam Chair.
July 26–27, 2016
71 of 283
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Anybody else? [No response] Okay. Well, let me end
by again thanking the staff for their fantastic work. I think the input that you’ve heard will be
useful as we prepare for further discussion in November.
Why don’t we take a break at this point to have lunch and resume at, say, 1:15.
[Lunch recess]
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay, folks. Will this group come to order? We’re ready to begin
with the Desk briefing, and let me turn things over to Lorie Logan.
MS. LOGAN. 2 Thank you, Madam Chair. The U.K. referendum vote to leave
the European Union dominated market attention over the intermeeting period. The
top-left panel of your first exhibit shows the changes in domestic asset prices over
various windows during the period, with red indicating declines in risk-asset prices
and increases in safe-haven asset prices and blue indicating the reverse. As you can
see from the first two columns, financial markets were highly volatile in the first few
days following the U.K. referendum, though asset prices have largely retraced since.
As shown in the third column, on net over the intermeeting period, short-dated
Treasury yields and the U.S. dollar were little changed, while the S&P 500 increased
about 5 percent and high-yield option-adjusted spreads narrowed roughly 60 basis
points.
In explaining the shifts in domestic asset prices over the period, market
participants suggested that the Brexit vote outcome increased downside risks to the
outlook for global growth, especially for the United Kingdom and the euro area. This
in turn fueled expectations of easier monetary policy across advanced economies and
prompted investors to “reach for yield,” Along with the better-than-expected U.S.
economic data, this prompted a reversal of the immediate effects of Brexit on
domestic asset prices.
The top-right panel focuses on the changes in expectations regarding monetary
policy in advanced foreign economies.
As you’d expect, the shift in policy expectations was biggest for the United
Kingdom, the red line in the top-right panel. While the Bank of England left its key
policy rate unchanged last week, interest rate futures in the United Kingdom are
currently pricing in a full 25 basis point cut at the upcoming meeting, with some also
expecting an expansion of the Funding for Lending Scheme or additional asset
purchases or both.
2
The materials used by Ms. Logan are appended to this transcript (appendix 2).
July 26–27, 2016
72 of 283
In the euro area, market-implied rates, the dark blue line, also shifted down,
although market participants view the most likely form of additional easing this year
to be a six- to nine-month extension of the ECB’s asset purchase program beyond the
current soft end date of March 2017.
In Japan, money market rates, the light blue line, are relatively little changed since
Brexit. However, surveys show expectations for an expansion of the BOJ’s asset
purchase program, which may include a doubling of ETF purchases as well as a
marginal increase in JGB purchases. In addition, expectations for Japanese fiscal
stimulus increased over the period on the back of Prime Minister Abe’s current ruling
coalition winning a supermajority in the Japanese upper house.
In the United States, the path of the target federal funds rate implied by market
prices was little changed, on net. In contrast, the most recent Desk surveys reveal a
notable shift in expectations regarding FOMC policy. As shown in the middle-left
panel, expectations for the most likely number of rate hikes over the remainder of
2016 moved lower. Roughly one-fourth of respondents now think that the most likely
outcome is for no hikes this year, and no respondents view two hikes as most likely.
Survey expectations for the target rate beyond 2016 also moved lower, with a
decline of about 20 basis points in the mean expectation for the target federal funds
rate at year-end 2017 and 2018. The decline in expectations was most pronounced
among dealer respondents and, as shown in the middle-right panel, resulted in a
narrowing in the gap between survey- and market-implied rates. Commentary by
survey respondents suggests these revisions to expectations of FOMC policy were
driven primarily by the Brexit outcome. Alongside the shifts in rate expectations, the
median expectation for the timing of a change to the Committee’s reinvestment policy
also pushed out notably, from the end of 2017 to the second quarter of 2018.
Expectations for more accommodative global monetary policy reportedly
contributed to the declines in longer-term U.S. interest rates over the period. As
shown in the bottom-left panel, the 5-year nominal Treasury rate 5 years forward
reached a historic low in the aftermath of Brexit, and the 10-year yield traded below
1.35 percent. The declines were driven almost entirely by real rates, as measures of
inflation compensation were little changed.
To better understand the moves in longer-term rates, a new Desk survey question
asked respondents to rate the importance of various factors in explaining the declines
in the 5-year nominal Treasury rate 5 years forward over two time horizons: first,
over the intermeeting period, and, second, from the start of the year to the June
FOMC.
As shown by the blue diamonds in the bottom-right panel, the highest-rated
factors for the intermeeting period were spillover from low or declining yields abroad
and safe-haven demand, although conversations with market participants suggest that
the effect of safe-haven demand was limited to the immediate aftermath of the U.K.
referendum. These spillovers, driven by the relative attractiveness of U.S. fixed-
July 26–27, 2016
73 of 283
income instruments amid a dearth of yield globally, appear to be a continuation of a
trend seen since the beginning of the year. In fact, as shown by the red diamonds,
spillover from global yields was also rated the most important factor contributing to
the declines earlier this year, followed by changes in the outlook for U.S. economic
growth.
For context on the low global yields, the top-left panel of your next exhibit shows
the portion of sovereign debt in Japan and the euro area with negative yields. In these
markets, most sovereign debt out to the 10- to 15-year maturity range is trading in
negative territory and, as a result, roughly 40 percent of all G-4 sovereign bonds yield
below zero. The low yields, driven by weak economic growth prospects, negative
policy rates, and expectations for further central bank easing measures, have
reportedly prompted many investors to rebalance their portfolios toward higheryielding assets.
In addition to driving longer-term U.S. yields lower, this “reach for yield” has
reportedly served to boost global risk asset prices. As shown in the top-right panel,
the S&P 500 increased roughly 4 percent to an all-time high, while the MSCI
Emerging Markets Index gained more than 8 percent over the period and month-overmonth inflows into EM equity funds accelerated to year-to-date highs.
Despite the strong performance of global risk assets and the relative resilience of
financial markets in the wake of the Brexit decision, market participants continue to
highlight several medium-term risks. The first relates to Brexit itself. Brexit-related
uncertainty is expected to persist for the foreseeable future, and as I noted at the
outset, the outcome increased perceived downside risks to economic growth. Market
participants are focused in particular on how political cohesion in the EU will evolve.
Thus far, there have been few signs of contagion, although in the wake of Brexit,
sentiment toward the European banking sector soured further. As shown in the
middle-left panel, the Euro Stoxx Banks Index, the light blue line, has declined more
than 10 percent since the referendum and more than 20 percent since the start of the
year, as sluggish economic growth and low net interest margins are expected to weigh
on profitability. As Steve will discuss, the Italian banking sector, the red line, has
been a notable underperformer.
A second point of investor concern in Europe as well as globally is the
persistently low levels of inflation compensation. Five-year, five-year-forward
inflation swap rates in the United States and euro area have increased a bit from the
lows reached post-Brexit. As shown in the middle-right panel, however, they remain
near historically low levels, perhaps reflecting the effects of constraints on monetary
policy at the zero bound.
A third risk relates to the possibility of renewed U.S. dollar appreciation. While
the broad dollar index, the light blue line in the bottom-left panel, was little changed
over the period, this masks a notable appreciation against developed market
currencies, the red line. Market participants continue to view a substantial dollar
appreciation and the capital flows that could result as a significant risk to markets.
July 26–27, 2016
74 of 283
The most salient concerns regarding dollar appreciation appear to be the risks it
poses to Chinese FX and financial markets and, in particular, whether it could
accelerate the need to delink the RMB from the dollar and lead to less perceived
transparency as Chinese authorities attempt to manage that process. The RMB
reached its weakest level against the dollar since 2010 over the intermeeting period,
as shown by the dark blue line in the bottom-right panel. Additionally, the CFETS
renminbi index has now depreciated more than 5 percent since the start of the year, as
shown by the light blue line. Thus far, investors appear to be taking the gradual
weakening of the RMB in stride but are quick to recall the volatility that the RMB’s
depreciation against the dollar last summer and earlier this year appeared to produce.
Your final two panels focus on money markets and Desk operations. As shown in
the top-left panel of your third exhibit, money market rates, particularly repo rates,
increased over the intermeeting period, as dealers sought to secure funding ahead of
the Brexit vote and the June quarter-end. The rise in secured rates put upward
pressure on unsecured rates, with the effective federal funds rate averaging 39 basis
points, 2 basis points above the previous period’s average.
Despite higher market rates relative to the overnight RRP rate, average daily
overnight RRP participation increased, as shown in the top-right panel. As shown in
red, Freddie Mac’s participation rose from an average of about $1 billion per day in
earlier periods to $12 billion per day, as part of its cash management strategy ahead of
planned buyback and reissuance of longer-term debt. More notably, government
funds’ overnight RRP usage, shown as the dark blue area, also increased. This
increase in usage came alongside a movement in assets under management from
prime funds to government funds ahead of the October implementation date for SEC
money market fund reforms. As shown in dark blue in the middle-left panel,
approximately $105 billion left prime funds this intermeeting period, while the AUM
of funds that invest in government and agency securities, the light blue area,
increased $100 billion.
Market participants expect this trend to accelerate in August and September.
Money funds we surveyed in June expected investor flows to generate a migration of
about $320 billion from prime to government funds, shown in light blue in the
middle-right panel, though estimates ranged widely across respondents. The realized
and expected investor flows come on top of the roughly $350 billion in prime funds
that have either converted or are in the process of converting to government funds,
the dark blue column in the panel. Altogether, this would leave roughly $850 billion
in AUM in prime funds, the red portion of the bar to the right.
Despite the increase in government fund AUM over the intermeeting period,
usage of the overnight RRP facility as a proportion of the overall assets under
management for RRP counterparties increased only modestly, as shown in the
bottom-left panel. This suggests that to date these funds have been able to
successfully allocate most of the new cash to private-market investments.
July 26–27, 2016
75 of 283
In anticipation of further investor outflows, prime funds have shifted their
investments toward shorter-term assets. As shown in the bottom-right panel, the
decline in prime fund holdings of commercial paper and time deposits has
accelerated, particularly as the three-month tenor recently crossed the reform
implementation date. Increased reluctance by prime funds to hold three-month
investments reportedly contributed to the widening over the intermeeting period in
the spread between three-month LIBOR and OIS rates, the red line. While not shown
here, the increase in LIBOR also contributed to the recent increase in U.S. interest
rate swap rates, which settle to three-month LIBOR.
Market participants suggested that the effect of money fund reform also
contributed to an increase in offshore dollar-funding costs, including the three-month
U.S. dollar cross-currency swap bases shown in the top-left panel of your final
exhibit. Recall that the basis measures the cost of borrowing U.S. dollars offshore
through the FX market relative to the costs of borrowing dollars directly. Some
contacts have noted that a reduction in prime funds’ lending to foreign banks could
have increased demand for funding through the FX swap market, and that this may
have pushed FX bases wider.
The upward pressure on offshore dollar costs also pushed the implied cost of oneweek offshore borrowing, shown in the top-right panel, above the rate on foreign
central banks’ one-week U.S. dollar auctions. Amid the shift in market pricing, we
observed higher demand at the BOJ and the ECB dollar auctions over the June
quarter-end and some modest usage in the operations that have followed, as shown in
the middle-left panel.
Turning to organizational matters, the middle-right panel summarizes the staff’s
work to modernize the documents governing foreign currency operations. The staff
had three objectives in conducting this work: first, to have the documents reflect the
current operating environment; second, to clarify policymaker guidance to the
Selected Bank; and, third, to improve the documents’ organization.
To achieve these objectives, the staff has undertaken a substantial rewrite of the
documents, with the proposed updates reflecting a significant number of changes to
the existing governance of the foreign currency operations. In view of the number of
changes proposed, we want to ensure that you have enough time to review them
before you’re asked for a vote. We plan to send you the updated documents and an
accompanying memorandum within the next few weeks and to request a vote to
approve these documents at the September meeting.
Pending approval of the governing documents in September, the Desk staff plans
to begin implementing the new investment framework for the management of the
foreign reserves portfolio shortly thereafter. As discussed at the April meeting, key
features of this new framework include establishing a process for assessing
policymakers’ investment preferences for the period aheadand using a more robust
risk–return methodology that incorporates those preferences.
July 26–27, 2016
76 of 283
Lastly, I want to mention two operational developments. First, last week
JPMorgan Chase announced its plans to exit the provision of settlement services for
OMO-eligible assets by mid-2018. At that time, Bank of New York Mellon is
expected to become the sole service provider supporting the clearing and settlement
of our domestic open market operations. JPMorgan’s announcement will not affect
the services it provides as custodian for SOMA agency MBS holdings. Second, the
staff conducted one small value operational test over the intermeeting period.
Information on this test, along with a list of upcoming exercises, is summarized in the
appendix. Thank you. That concludes my prepared remarks.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Are there questions for Lorie? [No response] Hearing
no questions, we need a motion to ratify domestic open market operations.
MR. FISCHER. So moved.
CHAIR YELLEN. And without objection. Okay. Let’s move along then to the
economic and financial situation, and Steve Kamin is going to start us off.
MR. KAMIN. 3 Thank you, Madam Chair. I’ll be referring to the materials titled
“The International Outlook.”
Let me say at the outset that if I never hear the word “Brexit” again, it will be way
too soon. If you are of the same mind, we are in for much disappointment, because
like campaign robocalls, Pokemon Go, and, as always, the Kardashians, we’re going
to be hearing a lot more about Brexit than we’d like in the coming months. In fact,
newly installed Prime Minister Theresa May has stated that she is not even going to
initiate the formal process of pulling Britain out of the EU until early 2017, and after
that, talks on a new trade deal will drone on for at least two years. Once the
bureaucrats start hashing out the details, the best we can hope for is that the
negotiations will be excruciatingly boring. At worst, well, I’ll get to that shortly.
It is still early days, of course, but at least for now, Brexit has turned out about as
well as we might have expected. As Lorie has described, outside of Europe, global
financial markets have largely reversed their earlier losses, and the dollar—which is a
key channel through which foreign events affect the U.S. economy—is up only about
1 percent since your June meeting. So, with financial and confidence spillovers from
Brexit largely contained, we see the main effect of Brexit on our baseline foreign
outlook being the hit to the economies of the United Kingdom and the euro area, with
some fairly small knock-on effects on other foreign economies operating mainly
through trade channels.
Given that we’ve never seen an event like Brexit, how do we calculate its effects
on economic growth in the United Kingdom and the euro area? The reduction of
3
The materials used by Mr. Kamin are appended to this transcript (appendix 3).
July 26–27, 2016
77 of 283
trade in goods and financial services should exert some long-term depressive effect
on productivity and output, but we believe the more immediate and tangible effects
will come through Brexit’s effect on uncertainty, confidence, and financial
conditions. As indicated in panel 1, the Baker, Bloom, and Davis measure of
economic policy uncertainty has ratcheted up this year in both the United Kingdom
and the euro area, as have measures of financial stress, shown in panel 2. To get
some sense of the economic effect of these developments, we estimated a vector
autoregression model that includes the uncertainty index, financial stress, GDP, and
several other variables. Drawing on this model, we estimate that heightened
uncertainty and financial stress should depress U.K. economic growth quite
noticeably over the next year relative to our June projection, as shown by the red solid
and dashed lines in panel 3, while euro-area growth, the blue lines, also slows, albeit
to a smaller extent. Later in the forecast period, as progress in Brexit negotiations
leads to greater clarity about the economic outlook and thus revived confidence and
spending, our new growth projections converge toward those we wrote down in the
June Tealbook.
Notwithstanding Brexit’s significant hit to European growth, the effect on the
global economy should be relatively muted. As shown in panel 4, the United
Kingdom accounts for only about 3½ percent of U.S. merchandise exports, while the
euro area amounts to about 15 percent. And outside of Europe, the outlook is little
changed from the June Tealbook. Accordingly, as shown by the black solid line in
panel 5, we have revised down our trade-weighted aggregate of foreign GDP growth
only about ¼ percentage point in the second half of this year and 0.1 percentage point
next year. As Brexit effects wane by the end of the forecast period, economic growth
in both the EMEs and AFEs should be running at roughly their trend paces.
Although the effect of Brexit on our baseline projection is relatively muted, Brexit
has revived some serious downside risks for the euro area. First, there is some chance
that the result of the U.K. referendum will provide the impetus for anti-EU groups
elsewhere in Europe, which already have been gaining political ground in many
countries, to either seek similar votes or to restrain the power of EU institutions in
other ways. As shown in panel 6, a survey of EU residents conducted in November
2015 indicated that, outside of the United Kingdom, people generally favored staying
in the EU, but sizable minorities favored leaving and the U.K. vote could boost those
numbers. The threat of a withdrawal by a continental European economy would
create serious concerns about the viability of the euro area and likely trigger a return
of the financial stresses seen during the euro zone crisis in 2011 and 2012.
Now besides that, Brexit has revived worries of a crisis in European banking. For
several years, European banks have struggled with low capitalization and poor
profitability, reflecting—to varying degrees—a weak economic environment, shallow
yield curves, low-to-negative interest rates, inadequate cost containment, and, as
shown in panel 7 on your next exhibit, elevated nonperforming loans. As Lorie has
described, following the Brexit vote, stock prices of European banks fell especially
sharply. For the most part, these declines reflected concerns about profitability rather
than solvency, as investors worried that lower economic growth and lower interest
July 26–27, 2016
78 of 283
rates would further depress bank returns. However, Brexit has also shone the
spotlight on banks in serious need of recapitalization. This spotlight is all the brighter
because in three days, the European Banking Authority will be publishing the results
of its EU-wide stress test, and banks viewed as having inadequate capital will likely
come under additional pressure.
Some of the banks likely to fare poorly in the stress test are in Italy, where NPLs
amount to 18 percent of loans and loan loss provisions are inadequate. Weaker-thanexpected results for a major Italian bank could create funding problems for Italian
banks in general if markets came to believe that the problems faced by Italian banks
were not going to be addressed. Such tensions could, in principle, lead to heightened
financial stresses in other peripheral economies, renewed pressures on peripheral
government finances, and, in the worst-case scenario, a return of the euro-area debt
crisis. However, for this to happen, many policy missteps would have to occur.
Estimates of the cost of a credible recapitalization of all Italian banks start at about
€45 billion. This is a manageable figure, amounting to less than 3 percent of Italian
GDP, and well below the European Stability Mechanism’s remaining lending
capacity of €370 billion. The key stumbling block so far has been that the EU’s new
bank resolution rules require any public recapitalization be accompanied by the bailin of a wide range of claimants, including unsecured bondholders and uninsured
depositors. This is a particular problem for Italy, where many unsecured bonds were
sold to retail customers as if they were safe deposit accounts, and forcing those
customers to take losses would be politically dangerous. At present, the Italian
authorities are working with EU officials on a solution to the problem. The solution
will likely involve less ambitious recapitalization, targeting just a few banks,
probably involving some private funds, and perhaps exploiting existing exceptions in
the bank resolution rules. A strategy along these lines will probably suffice to keep a
lid on Italy’s banking problems for the time being, but the pot could certainly boil
over at some future point.
Besides depressing growth and posing downside risks to the European economy,
Brexit appears to have triggered a further notch downward in global interest rates, as
shown in panel 8. We now expect that in response to weaker economic prospects, the
Bank of England soon will cut its policy rate 25 basis points to ¼ percent and resume
asset purchases, and the ECB will both cut its deposit rate an additional 10 basis
points to negative ½ percent and extend its asset purchase program by an additional
quarter to mid-2017. With Japanese economic growth and inflation also flagging, we
think it likely that the BOJ will also bolster its accommodation, probably through a
rate cut and stepped-up asset purchases.
Not surprisingly, the value of the dollar against the AFEs has risen over the
intermeeting period, as shown by the green line in panel 9, and we have accordingly
revised up our forecast path for the dollar against those currencies. What is more
surprising is that the value of the dollar against EMEs, the blue line, is down slightly
over the period. In fact, as shown in panel 10, since the Brexit vote, EME assets have
been experiencing a boom, with flows into emerging market funds soaring and credit
spreads narrowing sharply.
July 26–27, 2016
79 of 283
The source of the recent strength in EME assets has important implications for the
outlook for the dollar. If this strength largely reflects a relief rally following the
passing of the Brexit risk event, coupled with some impetus from further declines in
interest rates in Europe and Japan, gains in EME currencies might persist, consistent
with the path of the dollar against EMEs, shown in panel 9. Conversely, if the boom
in EME assets and, in fact, risk assets more generally is being supported by investor
expectations of easier U.S. monetary policy, as Lorie discussed, then investor surprise
at FOMC tightening could boost the dollar much more sharply than in our forecast
against both the AFEs and EMEs.
To be sure, we already are anticipating some rise in the dollar as markets discover
that the FOMC is tightening by more than they expected. That is why the dollar rises
against AFE currencies in our forecast. This Federal Reserve surprise effect is offset
for the EMEs by our assumption that the Chinese RMB will end up rising against the
dollar over the forecast period. But as indicated by panel 11, the sensitivity of the
dollar to changes in interest rates may now be higher than we are assuming. The blue
dots and blue regression line show that over the period from January 2010 to April
2014, following FOMC announcements, increases of 1 percentage point in interest
rate differentials were associated with a 2.1 percent rise in the dollar against AFE
currencies. We are currently assuming a dollar sensitivity of 2.5 percent in our
forecast. But, as indicated by the red dots and regression line, from 2014 to the
present, the sensitivity of the dollar to interest rate surprises has risen to about
4.5 percent. Accordingly, the dollar may rise by more in response to a U.S. monetary
policy tightening than we are currently assuming.
Another upside risk to the dollar forecast is posed by China. As indicated in panel
12, we are currently assuming that the RMB will stabilize over the next year before
appreciating thereafter, consistent with China’s still-high productivity growth and
mounting trade surpluses. However, with China apparently content to let the RMB
depreciate to support growth and with markets continuing to fret that growing
corporate debt could lead to a hard landing, there is some chance that a reemergence
of heavy capital outflows could keep the RMB moving downward.
To conclude, both the normalization of Fed policy and prospects for China pose
upside risks to our dollar forecast. Over the coming intermeeting period, we will be
considering how much of this upside might be worth incorporating into our baseline
projection. David will now continue our presentation.
MR. WILCOX. 4 I’ll be referring to the packet titled “The U.S. Outlook.”
The biggest surprise regarding the baseline outlook for the U.S. economy may be
how little it has changed since June despite—among other developments—the event
that Steve Kamin would prefer shall not be named. Accordingly, I will be relatively
4
The materials used by Mr. Wilcox are appended to this transcript (appendix 4).
July 26–27, 2016
80 of 283
brief in my coverage of the usual forecast update and instead provide a broader
review of the recent contour of the recovery.
The first panel of your forecast summary exhibit shows how various nowcasts of
second-quarter real GDP growth have evolved since the time of the June Tealbook.
Generally speaking, the nowcasting operations maintained at the Reserve Banks,
which are shown by the dashed lines, like the Board’s judgmental forecast (in black),
saw the incoming data during the intermeeting period as continuing to point to
second-quarter GDP growth in the neighborhood of 2 percent. On the basis of our
own track record over the past decade, we estimate that there’s a 70 percent
probability that the BEA’s first estimate, which it will publish this Friday, will lie
between about 1½ percent and 2½ percent. Of course, the BEA’s first estimate will
then be revised over time, so uncertainty about the true rate of growth of real GDP in
the second quarter is much greater than that.
As for the labor market, the June employment report substantially alleviated the
concern we had at the time of the June meeting that a broader deterioration in real
activity might have been in train. Welcome as that report was, I would hasten to note
that what one report delivered in terms of reassurance about the vitality of the
recovery, another report could just as easily take away.
Taking a longer-term perspective, the pace of improvement in the cyclical
position of the economy does seem to have slowed in recent quarters. The clearest
window onto this slowing is given in panel 2, which shows the Board staff’s
judgmental estimate of the output gap—the broadest measure of resource utilization
in our framework. After having narrowed reasonably rapidly during the preceding
couple of years, the output gap by our reckoning has been roughly flat since the
middle of 2015.
Assuming that our characterization of recent history survives the upcoming
annual revision to the national accounts, which is also scheduled to be released on
Friday, two questions immediately arise, as we noted in the Tealbook: First, why did
the slowing occur? And, second, what does it portend for the future?
Regarding why it happened, one important cause of the slowdown has probably
been the appreciation of the exchange value of the dollar since mid-2014, and the
associated deeper factors that gave rise to that appreciation. As you can see from
panel 3, the broad real dollar is currently more than 16 percent stronger than we
thought it would be as of the July 2014 Tealbook. As Glenn Follette emphasized in
his briefing yesterday, business fixed investment has been unexpectedly weak
recently and inventory investment has slowed from its rapid pace of a year ago.
These developments may themselves partly reflect the appreciation of the dollar
rather than be additional to it.
In our assessment, the dollar effect helps to explain why the pace of cyclical
improvement slowed as much as it did during a period when you increased the target
range for the federal funds rate only 25 basis points and the size of the SOMA
July 26–27, 2016
81 of 283
portfolio relative to GDP didn’t change very much. Indeed, one can even argue—
given the downward adjustment in market expectations for the trajectory of the funds
rate over the next few years—that the overall stance of monetary policy actually has
eased since mid-2014. A natural interpretation of all of this is that the appreciation of
the dollar since 2014 and all the factors that gave rise to that appreciation put a
substantial restraint on domestic economic activity—a restraint that we estimate to be
in the neighborhood of about 1 percentage point off the growth of real GDP both last
year and this year.
Thus, the dollar and the other factors that gave rise to dollar appreciation
plausibly substituted, in effect, for tightening that you might have otherwise had to
provide in the form of more aggressive increases in the funds rate. The FRB/US
model can give one rough estimate of the magnitude of the substitution. According to
the model, the unanticipated rise in the dollar’s exchange value over the past two
years was equivalent, in terms of its effect on the output gap, to an increase in the
federal funds rate of something like 150 to 200 basis points.
Turning to the second question that I posed earlier, if the stronger dollar played an
important role in generating the recent cyclical slowing, what does that portend for
the future? In particular, does it make sense that, in the baseline forecast, we have the
pace of resource tightening picking up steam again even as the funds rate moves up
more decisively? The answer is that, with dollar and other associated effects waning,
there is room both for the pace of resource tightening to pick back up to a slightly
more vigorous pace and for you to resume a program of gradually bringing the funds
rate up to its neutral level over the next several years.
Panels 5 and 6 show the evolution of two key indicators of labor market
conditions broken out by race or ethnicity. Broadly speaking, as shown in panel 5,
the unemployment rates for Hispanics or Latinos and for blacks or AfricanAmericans historically have tended to follow the main contours of the unemployment
rate for whites, but with a higher intercept and a larger cyclical sensitivity. An ocular
regression suggests that there may have been some modest improvement in the
relative experience of Hispanics over the past decade but not of blacks, and an actual
computer-based simple linear regression—albeit one that makes no attempt to control
for changes in age, education, or other relevant characteristics—corroborates that
ocular impression. Panel 6 presents similar estimates for the so-called U-6 rate,
which includes marginally attached persons and people working part time for
economic reasons. These estimates were prepared by the staff here at the Board using
microdata from the CPS. This measure tells roughly the same story. It is certainly
discouraging that neither the black–white nor the Hispanic–white differential in either
measure is materially smaller than it was a decade or two ago.
Although our baseline assessment of the outlook for real activity isn’t much
different from June, our perception of the risks to that outlook has been torqued in
different directions on the basis of domestic and foreign considerations. On the one
hand, the most recent labor market report provided welcome reassurance that the
labor market continues to improve, and this suggests that near-term domestic risks
July 26–27, 2016
82 of 283
have receded. On the other hand, I would note that at the time of your June meeting,
the U.K. vote was still seen through the windshield, not in the rearview mirror. While
the relatively calm response of financial markets in the short amount of time that has
transpired since then is also reassuring, I would argue that the vote to leave, which we
and others certainly didn’t expect, opens up a range of possibilities that we would
have dismissed if the vote had come out the other way, and none of those possibilities
look appealing.
The exhibits on the next page summarize the inflation outlook. Our projections of
both headline PCE inflation—panel 7—and core PCE inflation—panel 8—are
essentially unrevised from June, reflecting both incoming data that have been
unusually cooperative and revisions to the medium-term determinants of core
inflation that have been quite small. We continue to expect core PCE inflation to step
down modestly over the second half of this year. As we have noted before, this
pattern is partly attributable to the residual seasonality that the BEA has thus far not
succeeded in expunging from the PCE price index. In addition, we think that firstquarter core inflation was temporarily boosted by some outsized gains in a few erratic
components.
The next two panels reproduce the Tealbook’s inflation monitor exhibits, which
show the cumulative revisions since December of last year to our projections for total
and core PCE inflation and take a first cut at parsing out the sources of those
revisions. As you can see, the revisions have been mixed but, generally speaking, not
very large in either direction thus far. Focusing on the outlook for core inflation,
reported in panel 10, the bulk of the upward revision to our forecast of core inflation
this year reflects an upward surprise in the first quarter that we have mostly
interpreted as noise. On the other hand, we’ve shaved a cumulative tenth out of our
forecast of core inflation in 2017 and 2018, reflecting, as you can see, a variety of
very small factors.
Panel 11 shows three of the measures of labor compensation that we follow. In
recent years, nominal labor compensation growth has been relatively subdued in the
face of a steady reduction in labor market slack, although there are signs of a pickup
more recently in some measures. As Glenn Follette also discussed in his pre-FOMC
briefing, we think that the recent evolution of compensation can be reasonably well
explained by the behavior of trend real wage growth (which is itself related to the
growth rate of structural productivity), trend price inflation, and the staff’s estimate of
the unemployment gap. Panel 12 uses one of our models to decompose movements
in the ECI into the contributions of these various factors. As you can see from the red
portion of the bars, the model does view the reduction in labor market slack that has
occurred since the beginning of the recovery as a source of upward pressure on
compensation growth. However, that effect has been largely offset by a reduced
contribution of trend real wage growth—the green portion of the bars—that in turn
reflects a slowdown in structural productivity growth. Overall, this model isn’t
particularly puzzled by the recent behavior of either the ECI or the productivity and
cost measure of compensation per hour. At this point, I’ll turn it over to Michael.
July 26–27, 2016
83 of 283
MR. KILEY. 5 I’ll be referring to your handout on “Financial Stability
Developments.” My briefing will review developments since our last readout in
April, drawing on the quarterly quantitative surveillance report you received last
week. As we highlighted in the report, we continue to see the overall vulnerabilities
in the United States as moderate, primarily due to the strong capital and liquidity
positions in the banking sector, moderate growth of nonfinancial credit, and lack of
widespread valuation pressures.
The period since our last assessment included the decision by the United
Kingdom to leave the European Union. Note that I avoided the “B word” to spare
Steve, but I might not be able to keep it up. As Lorie and Steve have already
discussed, the outcome of the referendum led to sharp declines in risk asset prices and
volatility in financial markets that quickly receded. The first two panels of exhibit 1
illustrate some developments in market functioning. Foreign exchange markets
experienced large volumes and some temporary modest strains, with bid-asked
spreads (illustrated for the euro in chart 1) briefly widening to levels far above
intraday norms. Turning to fixed-income markets, our recent assessments have
highlighted the concerns expressed by some market participants and others regarding
reductions in liquidity. As can be seen in chart 2, bid-asked spreads for investmentgrade corporate bonds, the black line, widened around Brexit but not to an unusual
extent.
Stepping back from specific developments, the Brexit experience was a
significant real-time, albeit anticipated, stress test of the global financial system.
Reports indicate that trading remained generally orderly and liquidity across markets
held up reasonably well. In addition, supervisory data suggest that unscheduled
margin calls were substantial in the immediate aftermath of Brexit but were met
without any significant incidents. Financial markets and institutions have been
resilient to the shock to date, which may in part reflect early preparations by a wide
range of market participants, reduced leverage in the system, and communications
from central banks that they would take the steps necessary to provide liquidity to
support the orderly functioning of markets.
While the prices of many risk assets have more than fully recovered from their
post-Brexit lows, this is not true of European bank stock prices, as Steve and Lorie
already highlighted. Equity prices of large European banks, shown in chart 3, fell
substantially, and the prices for Deutsche Bank, Credit Suisse, and Barclays have
recently been near or even below the lows hit during the worst of the European debt
crisis in 2011 and 2012. In contrast, the stock prices for U.S. banks have largely
recovered from their post-Brexit decline and remain notably above their 2011 low.
The relative outperformance of U.S. banks undoubtedly is due importantly to the
relative strength of the U.S. economic recovery, although the improvement in lossabsorbing capacity at U.S. banks likely also plays a role. As shown in chart 4, the
largest U.S. banks all met their fully phased-in Basel III common equity tier 1 ratio as
of early this year; moreover, all of the U.S. banks participating in this year’s CCAR
5
The materials used by Mr. Kiley are appended to this transcript (appendix 5).
July 26–27, 2016
84 of 283
received nonobjections to their capital plans after demonstrating that their capital
levels were sufficient to withstand a severely adverse global recession. The
underperformance of European banks reflects a number of factors, including the
weaker outlook for economic growth in Europe, the further drag on already thin net
interest margins from low—indeed, negative—interest rates, and greater concerns
about the quality of their loan books. As Steve just mentioned, Italian banks have
been under particular pressure recently, and the results of the EBA’s stress tests—to
be released this Friday—and any related policy actions bear close watching.
An important link between European financial institutions and domestic financial
stability comes from the sizable exposures of prime money market funds to Europe,
illustrated in chart 5. Overall exposures were more than $500 billion, on average, in
recent months. Much of this exposure consisted of certificates of deposit and
commercial paper from financial institutions. Looking forward, on October 14, new
SEC regulations governing money market funds take effect. Under the new rules,
prime institutional funds will be required to float their daily net asset values and have
the ability to impose fees and, indeed, outright restrictions, or “gates,” on
redemptions. In response, and as discussed earlier by Lorie, a number of funds have
converted to types less influenced by the reforms, with the most common adjustment
involving conversion to a government-only fund. In addition, money fund managers
are preparing for potential withdrawals by investors who want to avoid the new
regulations and, as shown in chart 6, have shortened maturities and built liquidity
buffers in response. A survey of money fund managers conducted by the Desk
reported projected additional redemptions from prime funds could be on the order of
several hundreds of billions of dollars. While the reforms should improve the
stability of money market funds, there could be some short-term disruptions to
wholesale funding markets if large unexpected withdrawals were to occur. In
particular, some foreign banks could experience difficulties in obtaining dollar
funding.
Your next exhibit presents developments in nonfinancial credit and asset
valuations. Overall, nonfinancial credit has grown at a rate roughly in line with
nominal GDP (not shown), and we continue to see vulnerabilities stemming from
nonfinancial borrowing as moderate overall. In the nonfinancial corporate business
sector, leverage continued to increase, as shown in chart 1, and leverage among
speculative-grade and unrated firms—so-called high-risk firms—is now quite
elevated. High leverage among risky firms leaves them vulnerable to shocks. That
said, the pace of borrowing by such firms has slowed over the past year, as shown in
chart 2, in response to the increase in borrowing spreads (chart 3) and tightening in
lending conditions seen since 2014.
Credit spreads have remained on the high side of historical averages this year,
although they have clearly moved down from the levels seen early in the year.
Anecdotal reports hint at some pickup in valuation pressures in risk assets from a
view that extremely low (if not negative) yields in Europe and Japan leave the United
States as the only game in town for investors reaching for yield. It remains too early
to call a significant uptick in valuation pressures in the United States, and, for
July 26–27, 2016
85 of 283
example, the required return to equity (chart 4) remains near a historically typical
level and the equity premium (the difference between the black and red lines in
chart 4) remains relatively high. Of course, one reason that the equity premium has
widened this year is the decline in Treasury yields, highlighting the potential
dependence of asset prices on continued low longer-term Treasury rates.
The final two panels provide an update on developments in commercial real
estate, in which rapid price appreciation recently has led us to highlight the notable
valuation pressures emerging in this sector. Data through June point to continued
price gains and declines in capitalization rates, as shown in the lower-left chart. As
with equity valuation metrics, these capitalization rates do not suggest unusually low
expected returns relative to Treasury yields, but their steady decline highlights the
momentum in this sector. Nonetheless, there have been some indications of slowing
investor appetite for commercial real estate. For example, the Senior Loan Officer
Opinion Survey on Bank Lending Practices reported a significant fraction of banks
tightening lending standards for CRE, shown on the chart to the right, in the first and
second quarters of this year.
The last page of your handout presents our summary heat map of financial-sector
vulnerabilities. As in previous assessments, valuation pressures, private nonfinancialsector leverage, and maturity transformation all remain at the midpoint of our scale,
while we judge vulnerabilities from financial leverage to be low. That concludes our
set of remarks.
CHAIR YELLEN. The floor is now open for questions for any of our presenters.
President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Madam Chair. I have a question on “The International
Outlook”—exhibit 2, box 9, “Real Dollar Indexes.” You’ve got the dollar appreciating over the
forecast horizon. One question you might ask is: Wouldn’t markets already have integrated all
of the information that’s available, and, therefore, it wouldn’t really be very predictable where
the trade-weighted value of the dollar was going to go?
MR. KAMIN. That insight is exactly right, and that is an important part of the way we
forecast the dollar, which is to assume that everything the markets know or anticipate now is
already incorporated into the current level of the dollar. The only reason why we would predict
changes in the dollar—particularly the exchange rate against the advanced economies, whose
exchange rates are determined by the market—is if we thought the market was going to learn
July 26–27, 2016
86 of 283
something later that it does not know now. In general, of course, we don’t think we have any
greater insight into future events than the market does. However, there is one area in which we
think we might have some insight, and that’s the assumption in our forecast that the federal funds
rate will rise at a steeper gradient over the course of the forecast period than the market expects.
So the market expects a relatively small amount of tightening over the next few years. We have
built into our forecast a greater amount of tightening, so we assumed that as the market learns
about that and is surprised by the upward shift in the federal funds rate, it will accordingly bid
the dollar up, and that’s the rationale for the upward tilt in our exchange rate.
MR. BULLARD. I see. But, actually, my own forecasts don’t have that policy upswing.
So I guess if you’re applying this to what I have, then you’d say that maybe the dollar would
even depreciate, or at least you would make no forecast about the dollar.
MR. KAMIN. That could well be. Our forecast regarding the dollar is part of the overall
staff forecast of the U.S. economy and depends on the assumptions about U.S. monetary policy
that are incorporated into our staff forecast.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Other questions? President Williams.
MR. WILLIAMS. I have a question, diving deep into the Tealbook forecast, and that’s
specifically about housing. You highlight in the Tealbook that the incoming data on residential
construction suggest lower growth over the near term, but I’m a little bit puzzled by that. And,
I’m thinking ahead to the wording in the draft statement that residential investment is “soft.”
Real residential investment increased at a rate of more than 15 percent in the first quarter.
Outside commentators would describe housing—and this is how my own staff described it when
we discussed it—as a sector in which housing starts, permits, and existing home sales have been
July 26–27, 2016
87 of 283
strong and have been in fact above expectations, and that any slowing that we’ve seen in the data
may be just some weather effects, which have affected the timing of activity between Q1 and Q2.
So I guess I’m asking for your help in thinking this through: If you have a really strong Q1,
partly boosted by weather, and then a little bit of a takeaway in Q2, how do you view that? And
why would that make your forecast more negative about Q3 and Q4?
MR. WILCOX. By our lights, starts and permits data have been disappointing over the
past couple of months. And, basically, the permits numbers, which give a much higher signal-tonoise ratio reading on the underlying pace of activity, have been about flat since December of
last year. So we marked down our near-term forecast of single-family permits from the June
Tealbook to now.
Now, part of the reason why the residential investment figure in the national income and
product accounts is so strong in the first quarter was that there looks to have been a very large
spike in single-family starts in February; the series for single-family starts is pretty noisy. We
think that most of that is just statistical noise around a much steadier trend that’s formed by the
adjusted single-family permits. The starts number does feed mechanically through in a
distributed moving lag into the residential investment, but what we think basically is going on
there is that the BEA is feeding through a distributed moving lag of noise into the national
income and product accounts, and the permits numbers—which are not based on a sample but
are essentially a census of permits issued across the country—just give a much smoother picture.
And those numbers continue to disappoint. We’ve been steadily marking down our assessment.
We still think that the pace of construction is significantly below the demographically indicated
pace of units to be added to the capital stock.
July 26–27, 2016
88 of 283
MR. WILLIAMS. I agree with the latter point. I guess I’m going back to this
characterization of residential construction as being soft when it’s been growing, whether there is
statistical noise or not. If it’s been growing very rapidly and it just doesn’t keep growing or it
declines a little bit, that just seems a funny way to characterize residential construction.
MR. WILCOX. Permits have been basically moving sideways since the beginning of the
year, and we think that’s just a much better gauge on the pace of activity.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. John, is your concern that it’s an untrue statement, or is
your concern that because it’s included in the statement, it suggests that the Committee is putting
too much weight on it?
MR. WILLIAMS. Of course it’s the latter, right? Otherwise, I wouldn’t be talking about
this. So if you look at business investment, that has been slow, negative for quarter after
quarter—there’s no question that’s been a negative. But right after, we get a torrid—a term we
used back in the ’90s—rate of growth in a category, 15.6 percent, and then it falls by—I think
we’re writing down minus 3 percent for Q2, something like that—it just seems a little funny to
describe that as a “soft” sector, as opposed to business investment, which has clearly has shown
ongoing weakness rather than a big movement up and a little movement down. Even though
you’re saying permits are roughly flat, starts have moved up and then they’ve moved down, and
it just seems it’s harder to describe to the public why something that has been growing very
rapidly is “soft.”
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Of course, paragraph 1 is almost always characterized as
something like “data received since the previous meeting,” so we’re not stretching back over to
the beginning of the year.
MR. WILLIAMS. Right, but it’s the level—“soft” is a level in a way, I think.
July 26–27, 2016
89 of 283
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Look, I have some sympathy for your point, in the sense
that I’m not putting a lot of weight on that softness, But I agree with the staff that it is soft over
that interval.
MR. TARULLO. So is “soft” a relative or absolute term?
MR. WILLIAMS. Well, I would like to go back to what David said. The first-quarter
growth rate was 15.6. So you said some of that is “noise.” Even if we take that at face value,
then you’re really just saying that you’re taking that noise out of Q2, right? You’re saying that
the level over the two quarters is going to be up by—I’m going to have to do this math in my
head—15.6 minus 3.2 divided by 2. [Laughter] So the level is up quite a bit. Say there’s a little
bit of noise that pushed up that Q1 number, and you’re taking that away in Q2. That’s still not
soft, in my view. It’s really about quarterly growth rates having some ups and downs—a theme
I’m going to come back to tomorrow—overemphasis on quarterly ups and downs in some of
these data series. And we know that residential investment has a lot of quarterly volatility in it.
MR. WILCOX. I really don’t want to go to the mat over this issue that’s worth a few
basis points in terms of its contribution to GDP. If we’re going to get out the number two pencil
and put a really fine point on it, we were disappointed by the most recent data on starts and
permits. We’ve marked down our near-term trajectory for single-family permits—it’s a little
lower, it’s a little flatter than what it has been before. The trajectory of single-family permits is
essentially flat since the beginning of the year. To use Governor Tarullo’s typology, I guess my
answer would be “yes,” it’s soft in relative terms and in absolute terms. We’re significantly
below where we think the demographically indicated or neutral level of construction is. We’re
not going to get there for years, and the most recent tranche of data was a little disappointing.
July 26–27, 2016
90 of 283
MR. WILLIAMS. So, again, I’m going to drop it too—but in a moment. [Laughter]
And I will have an open mind. Our June statement said, “Since the beginning of the year, the
housing sector has continued to improve.” So you would say, “That’s no longer as true as it used
to be,” and you could just kill that sentence. But what we’ve done instead is to say, “Let’s kill
the ‘has continued to improve’ and say ‘is soft.’ ” That’s two notches down. That’s all. I’m
done. [Laughter] Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay. Other questions? Governor Fischer.
MR. FISCHER. I think this probably goes to Steve. On the broad real exchange rate, we
talk about the massive appreciation of the dollar. I’m looking at the Wilcox presentation, page 1,
chart 3. That shows that from the middle of 2014 to now, we went up from 93 or thereabouts to
110, and that the increase took place, in essence, over two years. Then we’ve basically got it just
staying flat here. I’m kind of puzzled, because whenever I listen to what we’re told about what
the exchange rate has done, the story varies—“recent changes in the exchange rate reduced GDP
growth 1½ percentage points, or ½ percentage point, or something.” And then I listen the next
time, and that number has been changed because something else happened. So do we have a
reliable set of data on what has happened to imports or exports because of the exchange rate,
particularly imports?
MR. KAMIN. I don’t have that off the top of my head, but I could certainly calculate
that for you. I will say that a couple of things are worth pointing out. Broadly speaking, our
exports over the past year or so have been flat. And that would compare in some kind of steady
state—normal conditions—with export growth of 3 to 5 percent. So, very clearly, the rise in the
dollar has depressed the growth of exports. Now, the rise in the dollar should have also led,
given normal GDP growth in the United States, to strong increases in imports. And as a result of
July 26–27, 2016
91 of 283
that, we should have seen pretty substantial subtractions from GDP growth from net exports. We
actually have not seen that in the past few quarters. In the first quarter, net exports actually
contributed 0.1 percentage point to U.S. GDP growth. In the second, we estimate that it
subtracted about one-tenth, and there were similarly smaller numbers in the last quarters of 2015.
With the dollar depressing exports pretty much as we would expect, the mystery in some
sense is why imports have been so weak. And one possibility, of course, is that somehow
exchange rates no longer are a relative price that would affect the choice between domestic and
imported goods. We have no reason to believe that is the case, although we are certainly
exploring that. Our best hypothesis as to what’s going on is that some components of U.S.
domestic spending that are particularly intensive in imports, particularly consumer durables and
equipment investment, have been quite weak, and that has been exerting a downward effect on
imports. That hypothesis is substantiated, or at least given support by, the fact that models that
we’ve estimated in which imports rely not on aggregate GDP growth but rather on the growth of
those particular expenditure components I just mentioned do a better job of explaining the
weakness of imports recently. By that metric, the reason that net exports are not taking away as
much from GDP growth as we might imagine is not because the exchange rate appreciation has
had no effect, but rather because other shocks to domestic spending have offset. So, by and
large, we think the exchange rate mechanism still works. Appreciation of the dollar has, indeed,
cooled exports, but other developments in domestic spending have offset the exchange rate effect
and depressed imports and have thus led to a smaller net exports drag than we might have
anticipated.
MR. WILCOX. And that the dollar appreciation probably plays some role in explaining
why investment has been as weak as it has been.
July 26–27, 2016
92 of 283
MR. KAMIN. Oh, absolutely. Right. That’s a good point because that would be a
knock-on effect that would not be captured just by the net exports components. In other words,
if manufacturers and exporters more generally were very chagrined about their future
profitability prospects, and they reduced investment, that would not show up in net exports,
exactly, but it would still be a drag on U.S. GDP growth attributable to the appreciation of the
dollar.
MR. FISCHER. Okay. Thank you.
MR. WILCOX. So just to put our dirty laundry out a little further, it’s not unusual for us
to be unable to trace dollar effects in the neat way to net exports so that the arithmetic lines up.
Nonetheless, when we take more of a top-line view of real GDP overall, the model estimates are
loose and imprecise, but they are rules of thumb, which were the basis for the figures that I cited.
They continue to point to magnitudes of overall GDP effects that are in line with what we’ve got
built in. It’s an uncomfortable fact that tracing it through only to exports and imports doesn’t
work very well.
MR. FISCHER. Thanks.
CHAIR YELLEN. Further questions? President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Yes. I was wondering what you know about why you now expect such a
large drop in defense in the second quarter—the revision happened over just one meeting. Also,
is there payback? And do you spread out the payback?
MR. WILCOX. We’ve been surprised by how weak defense spending has been. Glenn
Follette is here and can provide more details.
MR. FOLLETTE. Yes, we’ve been surprised at how weak defense spending has been.
[Laughter] That’s the reason for the large downswing in our Q2 forecast. We expect that
July 26–27, 2016
93 of 283
spending should come back, but it’s not guaranteed to come back next quarter and could be
spread out over time. And so in the forecast we have defense spending coming back over the
next couple of years.
MR. WILCOX. One way to put it, in sort of Washington-area lingo, is that—Glenn, help
me out here—there’s been no surprise in defense appropriations, but for reasons not particularly
apparent to us the spend-out from the appropriations has just been slower than expected.
However, it’s going to be in the pipeline. We haven’t, as Glenn mentioned, built an immediate
snapback in the level, but they will get those authorizations spent eventually.
MR. FOLLETTE. So the appropriations that they approved last December are for a fiscal
year, but those typically get spent out over a period of four or five years—about 60 percent in the
first year and the rest after that. But it’s not always 60 percent—55, 65, whatever—so there’s
some noise in the series.
MR. LACKER. Thank you. For what it’s worth, a contact of ours, a director in a large
defense contracting firm, when asked about this, cited some large contracts whose awards were
delayed. Our contact also suggested that at this time of the year—in an election year, with a
change of administration—typically, a lot of the workforce who do the contract awards leave, so
there are sometimes some delays from that as well, but it could come back in a couple of quarters
after that. So I’ll have to wait and see. Thanks.
CHAIR YELLEN. Other questions? [No response] Okay. There’s an opportunity now
to comment on financial stability issues, and I’ve got two people on the list. Anybody else who
wishes to comment is welcome to do so as well. President Rosengren.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Madam Chair. The QS report highlights the fact that
CRE overvaluation remains a concern. It concludes that the effects of a sizable decline in CRE
July 26–27, 2016
94 of 283
prices on financial stability are likely to be small. I remain concerned that the financial-stability
risks associated with CRE are elevated.
Out of the $3.6 trillion total commercial mortgages and multifamily residential
mortgages, $1.8 trillion are held by the banking system. Among asset classes held by leveraged
institutions, it is large, although not concentrated in particularly large institutions. It is also true
that a significant decline in the CRE market is unlikely to occur in isolation. However, if the
economy does weaken, I expect that a large decline in CRE collateral value risks significantly
reducing access to credit to all but the most creditworthy borrowers. Such conditions conform
well to the classic determinants of financial-stability problems—collateral values fall, and
payment streams are interrupted. Commercial and residential price declines account for most of
the significant international financial problems in the postwar period in advanced countries.
Once prices fall, it is obviously too late to act preemptively. Thus, now is a great time to test the
effectiveness of our preventive actions—a time when persistently low interest rates are
encouraging “reach-for-yield” behavior that may eventually be disruptive.
One simple anecdote illustrates my concern. In the third quarter of 2014, my staff
produced a table of banks with the highest ratios of total CRE to risk-based capital. Among
those 50 institutions, 11 have already failed. My concern is particularly heightened because
these banks have been unable to survive despite an improving economy, low interest rates, and
generally rising commercial real estate prices. These 11 banks with high CRE concentration
levels represent the preponderance of the total 15 bank failures that have occurred recently.
While failing in the current environment is likely illustrative of problems well beyond just
commercial real estate exposure, there would seem to be an exposure level that is sufficiently
July 26–27, 2016
95 of 283
high that it reflects poorly on management decisions and results in an unsafe and unsound
practice that should be limited. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Evans.
MR. EVANS. Thank you, Madam Chair. Over the past several weeks, we have heard a
good deal of talk about investors reaching for yield. In using the word “reach,” this terminology
presupposes elements of exuberance. But when you dig into some details, the recent
commentary seems different than the kind of reach-for-yield behavior that often flashes red with
respect to financial instability concerns. That kind of behavior represents short-term, speculative
hot money—chasing nickels in front of steamrollers—with an eye toward a quick and seemingly
costless exit through rapidly closing doors when all rates begin to rise.
MR. TARULLO. Yikes. [Laughter]
MR. FISCHER. We’ll keep an open mind. [Laughter]
MR. EVANS. It’s the kind of stuff that gave us the 2013 taper tantrum. At the moment,
I don’t see this kind of activity as being behind recent market moves. Rather, to me, the recent
behavior looks more like a capitulation to permanently low yields.
For example, our bank’s insurance financial monitoring team recently hosted a meeting
for President Lockhart and me with seven life insurance executives. We heard about some
substantial reassessments by real money managers with long investment horizons, and, of course,
insurance companies are one big piece of this group. Many of these long-duration asset
managers seem to be coming around to the view that persistently slow potential output growth
here and abroad will keep real interest rates low for a long time—longer than they likely
acknowledged one, two, or even three years ago. These investors now seem resigned to locking
in the yields they currently can get on safe longer-term fixed-income instruments. This
July 26–27, 2016
96 of 283
investment behavior also seems consistent with what we’re hearing from issuers of highly rated
corporate debt. For instance, a contact at Ford referred to an astonishing fixed-income market in
which high-quality debt is routinely oversubscribed.
I think the capitulation hypothesis has implications for our thinking about financial
vulnerability surrounding potential future monetary policy moves. Real money investors
resigned to lower rates in the long run seem less likely to think that an unexpected tightening will
lead to substantially higher longer-term rates. Rather, such tightening would simply flatten the
yield curve. This implies a reduced risk of outsized and persistent increases in longer-term
interest rates if we have to raise policy rates somewhat more quickly than what is currently
envisioned in the SEPs. Put another way, perhaps it is more the case that the decline in longerterm interest rates we’ve seen in the past year or so reflects lower expected policy rates over the
longer term as opposed to the large declines in term premium, such as those estimated by our
stationary mean-reverting affine finance models. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Is there anybody else who would like to comment on
financial stability issues? You’re welcome to weigh in. [No response] Okay. Seeing no takers,
I suggest we begin our go-round on the economy, starting with President Rosengren.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Madam Chair. Since our previous FOMC meeting,
stock prices are up, the 10-year Treasury yield has declined, credit spreads have narrowed, the
VIX is below average, and the trade-weighted exchange rate is little changed. While the Brexit
vote is likely to have negative economic ramifications for the United Kingdom and possibly for
Europe, to date the effect on U.S. financial data has been quite benign. In addition, while we do
not have much real data that reflect the post-Brexit period, the data just before Brexit were
July 26–27, 2016
97 of 283
positive. For example, employment rebounded strongly in June, allaying many of the concerns
raised by the weak May employment report.
Not surprisingly, in light of the generally positive news, my forecast has changed little. It
remains slightly more positive than the Tealbook forecast for the end of 2016, with real GDP
slightly higher, core PCE inflation slightly higher, and the unemployment rate slightly lower. In
essence, it looks quite similar to the July Blue Chip forecasts of these variables. Specifically, my
forecast for the end of the year has an unemployment rate of 4.7 percent and core PCE only
somewhat below 2 percent. Thus, I expect us to be quite close to achieving our dual mandate by
the end of the year. Hence, it is not surprising that my forecast includes two increases in the
funds rate this year, in September and December.
It is notable that the Tealbook expects the unemployment rate to fall to 4.3 percent by
2018. It is also notable that all of the scenarios modeled in the Tealbook result in an
unemployment rate of 4.3 percent or lower, with the exception of the “Severe Financial Stress in
Europe” scenario. While I am comfortable probing to determine how low the natural rate of
unemployment may be, I view 4.3 percent as more of a plunge than a probe. It is not that tight
labor markets have no benefits. I would like somewhat tighter labor markets than what we have
now to offset some of the labor scarring that occurred in the Great Recession. However, history
shows that when the unemployment rate gets as low as 4.3 percent, monetary policy tightens in
an attempt to raise the unemployment rate back to full employment. But, almost always, our
attempt to achieve a smooth landing ends poorly, as the unemployment rate responds much more
than intended, resulting in a recession. What is striking when looking at unemployment over
time is how rarely we are able to keep unemployment rates near anyone’s estimate of full
July 26–27, 2016
98 of 283
employment for an extended period. Put differently, part of achieving maximum employment is
avoiding significant overshooting of full employment and the recession that typically follows.
One possibility for caution in continuing the normalization of the funds rate might be
heightened uncertainty. The buoyant stock market suggests that this uncertainty is not weighing
heavily on market participants. The widely used VIX measure of uncertainty is currently well
below its norm. A new, broader measure of uncertainty is the news-based Economic Policy
Uncertainty Index, which is available daily. After being low for most of the year, it spiked for a
day or two on the Brexit news and is once again at relatively low levels. One might think that
greater uncertainty would lead some forecasters to predict more dire economic outcomes.
Instead, the Blue Chip’s July survey of forecasters reported the average of the 10 highest
forecasts of unemployment at the end of 2016 and 2017 at 4.9 percent and 4.8 percent,
respectively. Perhaps the greatest tail risk right now is the one modeled in the Tealbook as
“Severe Financial Stress in Europe.” In that scenario, the unemployment rate peaks at
5.1 percent in 2017. Even so, we continue to raise the federal funds rate but at a slower rate than
in the baseline and still noticeably faster than markets currently expect.
In summary, I expect that we are likely to be close to both elements of our dual mandate
by the end of the year, and I do not see the risks to the economy as being particularly elevated. I
will discuss tomorrow what that implies for policy. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Lacker.
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Madam Chair. Both of the Fifth District surveys, just
released this morning, improved in July and are now in positive territory. On the manufacturing
side, the composite index swung from minus 10 to plus 10, and the new orders component swung
July 26–27, 2016
99 of 283
from minus 17 to plus 15. On the services side, the overall revenue index rose from plus 2 to
plus 8. The wage indexes are strongly positive across all sectors.
At the national level, in my mind, the overall outlook has not changed appreciably since
the June meeting. Consumer spending gains are likely to account for most of the growth in real
GDP this year, and the June retail sales report increased my confidence in the outlook for
consumption. Other sectors are likely to contribute less to overall economic growth. Recent
data suggest that homebuilding may have flattened out. We continue to hear frequent reports of
residential construction being limited by shortages of buildable lots and skilled workers, so
supply-side factors rather than softer demand may be what’s limiting residential investment.
This view is consistent with the home price inflation that we see in the CoreLogic repeat sales
index and would point toward “soft” not quite the right adjective for the housing market.
Although business investment remains weak overall, there’s been at least some positive
news. In the latest estimate of first-quarter GDP, the growth rate for real intellectual property
investment was revised from basically zero to more than 4 percent. And with the price of
petroleum now above $40 per barrel, the rig count has ticked up, suggesting that spending on
new oil and gas wells has bottomed out. Along with the Tealbook, I expect investment in
nonresidential structures to begin to grow again in the third quarter. There are even some signs
of near-term firming in equipment. For example, one of our roundtable members from the trade
association representing what we used to call “machine tools”—they call themselves the
Association for Manufacturing Technology now—reported a substantial increase in requests for
price quotations in recent months. At the end of each quarter, he surveys, a couple of dozen
contacts within the industry. He expects the price quotations to lead to increased orders later this
year and bases that on the rate at which these are converted. They’re expecting a good finish to
July 26–27, 2016
100 of 283
2016 and things to pick up in 2017 by10 to 20 percent. This seems consistent with the Tealbook
outlook for investment in equipment. My overall outlook, then, is for strong growth in consumer
spending and improving growth in business investment to offset a slowdown in housing and
yield 2 percent real GDP growth for the next few quarters.
In the labor market, I think we should see falling employment growth this year and very
little further decline in the unemployment rate. With the benefit of the June employment report,
it now seems clear that the May payroll number was a fluke. That said, employment growth has
averaged 147,000 jobs per month in the second quarter compared with 229,000 jobs per month
last year. So it’s pretty clear that we’ve seen some step-down in employment growth. But even
at the current pace, the employment-to-population ratio would continue to rise, and that seems
unlikely to go on for much longer. As I’ve been arguing since the beginning of the year, I think
we should be prepared to see monthly job growth continue to fall, consistent with convergence to
a more sustainable steady-state trajectory, notwithstanding President Rosengren’s caution about
actually being able to achieve that.
On inflation, I would note that in December, the Tealbook was forecasting 1.4 percent
core PCE inflation for both Q1 and Q2 of this year. Now the forecast is for 1.9 percent for the
first half, but the forecast for the second half is basically unchanged. Some of that first-half miss
can plausibly be attributed to one-time factors and residual seasonality. But I doubt that all of
the pickup in core inflation in the first half is going to prove short lived, so I’m expecting core
inflation in the second half to come in close to 2 percent as well. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Fischer.
MR. FISCHER. Thank you, Madam Chair. If we remember where we were six to seven
weeks ago, that’s when we decided that the situation was significantly unclear. First, we had the
July 26–27, 2016
101 of 283
May hiring figure, which we then thought was 70,000—and now know to be 11,000—and we
were worried that something bad was going on in the labor market. And then we had the
U.K. referendum just a little less than a week after the meeting, and there was no good reason
whatever to make a decision before we knew what happened there.
So we had two reasons. Now we have come through both those reasons pretty well. The
employment number came out at 287,000 for June, as you know, and a little bit of arithmetic
made that to be 147,000 per month over the previous three months, which was less than we had
forecast four months ago but well above the estimates we have of how much hiring you need in
order to keep the unemployment rate from rising. So that looked okay.
And then we had to think about Brexit, if you’ll excuse the expression. I happened to be
near the scene of the crime and woke up at about 2:30 in the morning and turned on the TV, and
it was clear it was going to be a disaster, so I went back to sleep. [Laughter] At 5:30 or so you
got the truth. That Friday morning there were quite a few people from the U.K. in the seminar
we were in, and they and we all were feeling very unhappy, and we could imagine terrible
scenarios of the breakup of the European Union and all sorts of things that were going to happen.
Well, where are we now? We shouldn’t, I think, delude ourselves that the United
Kingdom is in for an easy time. They have got a lot of negotiating to do. We always want
structural change in Europe. Well, the British are undertaking a massive structural change. They
are going to have to renegotiate their entire set of external relations. That’s a lot of work. And
then they’re going to have to actually implement what they negotiated. So this is going to take a
long time. It’s going to be complicated and probably take five years until they have done most
of what they need to do. And during that time we will get bumped around from time to time. In
negotiations like that there are always crisis points, and there are late-night negotiations and
July 26–27, 2016
102 of 283
concern that the thing is about to break down, and at three o’clock in the morning it transpires
that they got a compromise, and so forth. We’re going to see those things coming our way from
time to time, and they’re going to make our environment a little bit more bumpy than we would
have wanted, but they will make it a lot more bumpy for the United Kingdom, and they could
make it more bumpy for the rest of Europe. There are very worrying scenarios about the future
of the European Union. According to people I speak to and read about, the reaction in Europe
actually, at this stage, is, “Gosh, we don’t want to be in the situation like the British are in at the
moment.” So they think it strengthened the European Union. However this is after a monthplus, and the actual events are going to play out over several years. We know very little about
what’s actually going to happen.
I think that in terms of the United States, the United Kingdom is relatively small from our
perspective, with the exception of the financial side, and that the effect on us will come in part
through whether our banks stay in London and what happens to London as a great financial
center. At this moment, the Europeans think they are going to attract it all to Europe. That’s not
entirely clear, but one hears stories about our banks planning their moves or moves of part of
their corporations.
The first political news in the United Kingdom was the public opinion poll taken earlier
this week, which showed people being very shocked and expectations being very negative. The
Bank of England has made it clear it’s going to do something at its August decision, and the
ECB has been a little less clear that it’s going to do something. But both of them seem to think
they’re going to do packages—that is, that it won’t be just an interest rate reduction, but an
interest rate reduction and some other elements of QE or possibly forward guidance or whatever
July 26–27, 2016
103 of 283
there is in the bag of tricks at that point. So something positive will come out of all that, but
we’re fairly ignorant.
There hasn’t been a great deal of evidence of difficulty in the capital markets. In the case
of the United Kingdom, the pound depreciated, as one would have expected. Interest rates are
down significantly, as one would have expected. Bank share prices are down a long way, and
there were rumors of liquidity difficulties in the first days after the referendum, and then there
were those real estate mutual funds that had to suspend withdrawals. But it wasn’t a huge thing.
For the United States, aside from our banks, there hasn’t been a whole lot of the share market
that’s been very affected. So it hasn’t been big for us and probably won’t be big for us, provided
we continue to manage ourselves well.
But what about conditions in our economy? I’m impressed by the robustness of what has
been happening. I keep thinking of the fact that we’ve just had a series of negative shocks. I feel
very guilty about this, because when I arrived at the IMF in 1994, my arrival was followed three
months later by the Mexican crisis, and there was a crisis every few months until the Argentine
crisis when I left, and then nothing happened for three or four years. [Laughter]
MR. TARULLO. They were worried about having a crisis without you there, Stan.
MR. FISCHER. That’s right. So I feel a little bit guilty about all of these things that
have happened to us. But after the things that have happened to us over the past year or so,
including the Chinese letting their exchange rate go—which they seem to be continuing to do in
a very controlled manner at the moment as well—and then Brexit and a succession of things that
worried us, the economy looks quite similar to what it looked like before except that we’re on a
lower path. Economic growth has been down a little bit, but we’re expecting a catch-up. And
somewhere in this economy and in the labor market, in ways we, or at least I, don’t understand
July 26–27, 2016
104 of 283
there’s something very robust that’s been happening for a lot of years as employment growth
continues, except for that terrible month that worried us.
If you look at the components of aggregate demand, PCE growth has contributed in a
major way to GDP growth. Investment continues to be weak. I don’t know if we can call
investment performance “weak.” Investment has been weak for a long time, and I think we may
just be at a new normal on investment, although there are some stories now about U.S. oil
production beginning to come back, and that would presumably bring with it some of the
associated investment whose disappearance helped reduce aggregate investment for the U.S.
economy.
If you look at the rest of the world, Europe is very unknowable. The Chinese are
somewhere around 6 percent, which is fairly good. But the nature of Chinese economic growth
has changed, and it’s less investment intensive, so they’re importing less from the rest of the
world than they used to. It seems that what they were importing was based more on an
acceleration model than on a straightforward multiplier model, and so that’s a slowdown. And
then Latin America is just changing disaster places. Now we’ve got Venezuela instead of
Argentina and so forth, but there are some positive signs there. Africa doesn’t look very good.
India does look very good. So the rest of the world is not terrible, but it’s not great.
If we look at other things that might happen here, the money market mutual fund reforms
that are coming seem to me to be bothersome, but they’re all anticipated, so maybe they’re not
going to be a bother. I think we can take some comfort in the fiscal policies we’re going to get
whoever wins the elections, because, as far as I can see, both candidates are going to raise
spending. One’s going to cut taxes—that’s expansionary. The other’s going to raise spending.
July 26–27, 2016
105 of 283
So a year from now we could have a fiscally driven expansion, if all works out, and that will be
good for us. But, unfortunately, I don’t know if we’re going to have that.
I won’t make any policy recommendations until tomorrow, but we’re in a situation that is
way better than we feared it might be at our previous meeting, and we’re just probably going to
wait a little while to see if the situation continues to strengthen. Thank you very much, Madam
Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Madam Chair. I read the incoming data as largely
consistent with the view of the economy summarized as follows: continuing moderate economic
growth, near full employment but with some absorbable slack remaining, and signs of gradually
rising price pressures with associated movement toward the Committee’s target.
My Bank’s tracking estimate for the second quarter now rests at a 2.4 percent annualized
rate, a little stronger than the number in the Tealbook. In terms of the composition of GDP
growth in the second quarter, distinctions between our assessment of the second quarter and the
Tealbook are minor. Business investment remains soft, and that softness is broad based. The
current strength of the economy is largely based on the strength of consumer activity. Reports
from our retail contacts in my District this cycle confirm the strength in consumer spending.
Most retailers reported healthy sales levels and a relatively optimistic outlook for the remainder
of 2016. Tourism remains solid, and we heard of a shift in the composition of demand away
from international visitors and toward domestic travelers. In recent meetings, I’ve passed along
reports of our director who heads the nation’s largest auto retailer. He continues to report very
high sales volumes but cautions that high fleet sales are in the mix, and consumer sales are being
maintained by substantial discounts and incentives. Whereas, after the May employment report,
July 26–27, 2016
106 of 283
there seemed to me to be some disconnect between data and anecdote, recent reports from our
business contacts in the Sixth District are mostly consistent with my read of the incoming data.
My outlook for the economy remains unchanged from the June meeting and from my last
SEP submission. My outlook resembles this meeting’s Tealbook, with the only exception being
that my forecast anticipates a slightly faster closing to the inflation target. Recent retail price
reports are broadly in line with my assumption of firming inflation readings. These reports have
been encouraging but not definitive. My staff cautions that recent component price movements
underlying the inflation reports exhibit unusual disparity.
A key assumption in my outlook is an improvement in the pace of business investment.
This assumption carries some risk. In the most recent contact cycle, my team took every
opportunity to probe thinking on capital spending. While most of our conversations suggested
some longer-term optimism about prospects for expansionary, capacity-building cap-ex, we
heard little that would suggest a near-term resurgence in spending. Current capital investment is
depicted mostly as replacement, oriented toward productivity improvement, or focused on cost
takeout. Some contacts mentioned their excess capacity; we also heard comments on new
foreign-sourced product competition responding to global capacity and the stronger dollar.
A number of companies repeated that M&A is their preferred growth strategy.
Acquisitions bring their own incremental revenues and demand. Firms continue to be cautious
about assumptions of organic growth. Businesses continue to report little in the way of direct
pricing power. I would note, however, that some retailers indicated that price promotions had
eased. Other firms indicated that they have been able to capture and retain commodity cost
reductions in their margins. Finally, a number of public companies noted greater pressure
July 26–27, 2016
107 of 283
coming from investors to justify capital investments and, implicitly, higher return hurdles and
shorter payback horizons.
So business fixed investment is a sphere of activity in which anecdotal feedback is not
currently lining up well with my forecast assumption. At this time, I’m prepared to treat
business fixed investment as a risk—the risk being a failure to realize an assumed upside. If
improved business investment does not materialize, the outlook on which I’m premising further
policy rate increases cannot easily rely on personal consumption in isolation. Investment,
enhanced productivity growth, wage growth, and rising business and consumer confidence must
be part of the picture.
Others have commented on the uncertainty factors associated with Brexit. The outcome
of the July 23 Brexit referendum seems to have affected business confidence in the immediate
aftermath, but recent soundings suggest that concern among business leaders in my District is
modest. In the week following the referendum, we got 244 responses to a survey of CEOs and
CFOs, and roughly one-third indicated Brexit had introduced some uncertainty into their
individual business outlooks. In a second survey a week later of nearly 400 CEOs and CFOs, the
portion of firms reporting Brexit affecting their sales had dropped sharply to only about
15 percent. So I’m satisfied that we’ve gotten beyond the immediate uncertainty that drove the
Committee’s caution at the June meeting, and I see the appropriate focus in coming weeks being
mostly on domestic economic performance. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Powell.
MR. POWELL. Thank you, Madam Chair. At the time of the June meeting, three
factors raised concerns about the economy’s underlying momentum. First, economic growth
appeared to have downshifted from its long-time post-crisis path of about 2 percent. Second,
July 26–27, 2016
108 of 283
payroll growth seemed to be slowing, possibly quite sharply. A third factor was the impending
referendum, to use the Kamin-friendly term.
Since the June meeting, incoming data have provided some reassurance on all three
fronts. Most forecasts show second-quarter GDP rebounding nicely to the mid-2s, although, at
1.8 percent, our Tealbook forecast is lower than that and at the low end of the estimates. And the
BEA, of course, will provide a first official estimate for second-quarter GDP growth later this
week. The June payroll report was surprisingly strong, as has been noted. And the referendum
vote, while a surprise, seems likely to have little near-term implications for the U.S. outlook.
Turning to economic growth, GDP growth has now been only 1.6 percent over the past
four quarters ending in the second quarter, taking the staff forecast for the second quarter. The
same figure for the four quarters ending in the second quarter of 2015, as Glenn Follette pointed
out yesterday, was 1 full percentage point higher. A good part of that downshift has been in
business investment, which goes well beyond the energy sector, for which low oil prices provide
a sufficient explanation for the decline. And, of course, a lower path for cap-ex reduces the
likelihood that we will see a near-term rebound from the awful productivity growth we have had.
It’s also a signal perhaps that businesses’ expectations for further growth have moved down, as a
Tealbook box indicated. And then, echoing what President Lockhart just said, it’s hard to see, as
a matter of arithmetic, how we get back to sustainable 2 percent GDP growth without higher
investment as another engine of demand. Consumption alone is not likely to be a strong enough
engine.
The 15 percent or so appreciation of the dollar since mid-2014 has been weighing on
demand through net exports, including some that is counted as E&I spending. If the dollar
remains broadly stable, that effect should wane over the next year or two. Like many others, I
July 26–27, 2016
109 of 283
have thought of the outsized appreciation of the dollar as a tightening in overall financial
conditions, which David Wilcox estimated earlier, if I followed him correctly, in the range of
150 to 200 basis points. But 2016 has actually been a time of significant loosening in financial
conditions. Since the beginning of the year, the dollar is about flat on a trade-weighted basis,
stock prices are up, and the 10-year Treasury is down 70 basis points. And the implied federal
funds rate path has flattened significantly. So the tightening cycle that began in December 2015
with a single rate hike has actually so far been a period of significant loosening.
Perhaps others on the Committee are still taking on board the full extent of the decline in
the neutral rate of interest. That has certainly been the case for me. In any case, it is notable to
me that the apparent weakening in demand and in job growth is happening even as anticipated
policy is becoming materially more accommodative. In effect, monetary policy has had to work
harder and harder just to sustain a fairly weak economic growth forecast.
To me, this argues for patience and a bit of caution, not panic. Some of the apparent
slowdown in demand probably reflects transitory factors or statistical noise. The fundamentals
driving household and business spending still seem quite supportive of economic growth,
including solid increases in real income, accommodative financial conditions, low gas prices,
and healthy levels of business and household confidence. In addition, this easing of financial
conditions should add a bit of momentum in the second half. Accordingly, despite the lackluster
first-half performance, I still see 2 percent GDP growth or thereabouts for 2016, although I
would say there is some modest downside risk to that.
Turning briefly to the labor market, the pace of job growth is far from clear, with 11,000
new payroll jobs in May and 287,000 in June. We’re going to need a couple more readings to
assess the new trend. It does seem likely that the pace of job gains is slowing, down to an
July 26–27, 2016
110 of 283
average rate of about 150,000 in the second quarter. That is enough to drive further declines in
unemployment or increases in participation or both, albeit at a slower pace. I don’t see this
downshift as desirable or necessary to avoid overheating. Desirable or not, though, the
downshift has probably arrived, and it is tolerable as long as payrolls are increasing faster than
the breakeven rate.
Core PCE inflation was 1.6 percent over the 12 months ending in May, up from
1.3 percent a year earlier, still being held down by the indirect effects of lower oil prices and the
stronger dollar. Looking through those transient factors, I see the underlying inflation rate as
close to 2 percent, suggesting that inflation should move up to our target as these influences fade.
Low inflation expectations remain a concern.
Downside risks to the outlook have diminished, although the risks in the international
arena remain substantial. The referendum is probably not an important near-term risk for us, but,
as Stan indicated, the coming period of negotiations between the United Kingdom and the
European Union could well involve risk-off episodes, and we could feel those here in the United
States. In addition, the weaker condition of the European banking system will restrain European
economic growth while also creating some tail risk of broader financial turmoil. More generally,
European and Japanese authorities have limited remaining scope to address ongoing weakness
and any new shocks. And while data regarding China have been positive, the need for its
authorities to turn to stimulus measures suggests that the risks are concentrated on the downside
there as well.
In sum, I expect both spending and labor market data to remain solid for the next few
quarters, with inflation still quiescent. It is to our advantage to see more data to get a better
July 26–27, 2016
111 of 283
assessment of the underlying strength of the economy. More on that tomorrow. Thank you,
Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Brainard.
MS. BRAINARD. Thank you, Madam Chair. The most noteworthy event of the
intermeeting period was the United Kingdom’s vote to leave the EU. It’s reassuring that
financial markets proved resilient in the wake of the vote, although this development increases
uncertainty in the global outlook. In parallel, reassuring reports on real activity in the United
States, in particular the June reports on employment and retail sales, have reduced concerns
about an abrupt slowing in domestic demand growth. Even so, reductions in the pace of job
gains and GDP growth over the past few quarters suggest a notable slowing in economic
momentum. Let me take each of these developments in turn.
First, recent developments have reduced some near-term uncertainty that weighed on the
outlook at our previous meeting. Most importantly, financial markets have appeared resilient in
the face of the “leave” vote. After an initial selloff in risky assets U.S. financial conditions
appear little changed, on net, apart from a modest increase in the exchange rate. Although the
Brexit vote outcome surprised many, it’s important to note that policymakers were well aware of
the possibility in advance and took precautionary steps. In addition, the market reaction appears
to reflect, in part, expectations of additional policy support in Japan, the United Kingdom, and
the euro area.
Here at home, we’ve had some reassuring data on the labor market and aggregate
spending. Employment growth bounced back sharply in June after registering essentially no gain
in May. The intermeeting data on wages have been consistent with previous signs of a moderate
step-up in wage growth. And the labor force participation rate ticked back up last month and
July 26–27, 2016
112 of 283
appears to have been about flat over the past two years, consistent with continued moderate
cyclical improvement.
Consumption has also proven robust. After weak first-quarter growth, consumption
likely increased strongly last quarter and looks to have advanced at close to a 3 percent pace over
the first half of the year, a value similar to the average pace over the past two years.
Nonetheless, it’s important to note that consumption accounted for virtually all of GDP growth
over the past two years and continues to be the main driver of aggregate demand. Buoyant
sentiment, further gains in equity and home prices, and continued growth in jobs and wages
should continue to provide support.
Nonetheless, we see a notable slowing in economic momentum in other components.
Taking the staff’s Q2 forecast as given, GDP has risen at an average annual rate of about
1½ percent over the past three quarters compared with growth of 2 percent last year and
2½ percent in the preceding two years. Business investment, as has been noted, has been a
particular drag. This likely reflects the earlier depressing effects of a higher dollar and lower oil
prices. In the period ahead, it may be that uncertainty associated with the weak global outlook,
an election year, and now Brexit, may be restraining investment. Moreover, it appears that the
credit cycle may be turning. Data from the SLOOS point to a marked tightening in standards for
CRE loans as well as a modest tightening in C&I loan standards.
Residential investment has also slowed as single-family building permits have flattened
out. We might expect housing activity to strengthen in coming months as house prices continue
to increase, as they did today. Mortgage rates are extremely low, and credit conditions for wellqualified borrowers have eased further, according to the SLOOS, but it’s also possible that the
sluggish recovery and recent flattening out in residential investment could reflect a lasting
July 26–27, 2016
113 of 283
change that will continue to hold the growth in new units below levels suggested by
demographics.
Employment growth has also slowed in recent quarters, as has been noted. Monthly
payroll gains averaged about 150,000 over the previous quarter, a notable step-down from
200,000 in the first quarter and 230,000 last year, and it appears that this has happened despite
the fact that some slack in the labor market remains. The prime-age employment-to-population
ratio is still 1¾ percentage points below its pre-crisis level, and the number of workers working
part time for economic reasons is still elevated.
More broadly, recent data on price inflation suggest little evidence that resource
constraints are starting to bind, and the greater concern may be soft inflation expectations. The
most recent 12-month change in core PCE, at 1.6 percent, remains below our target, and core
inflation has now been below the target for 88 of the past 92 months. I’m concerned by any
signs that inflation expectations will remain soft. Recent changes in survey measures of inflation
expectations from Michigan and the New York Federal Reserve were positive, but they still
remain below their pre-crisis norms, and inflation compensation remains stubbornly mired at an
extremely low level.
Despite the limited near-term fallout from the leave vote, the associated medium-term
risks, I think, are still weighed to the downside. It’s still too early to know what the
macroeconomic reaction to the process of redefining the relationship with the EU will be, but
both staff forecasts and the IMF do project a materially slower growth rate in the United
Kingdom and somewhat slower growth in the euro area. July’s PMI reading for the United
Kingdom was consistent with that outcome. Unfortunately, this expected slowing occurs at a
time when weak European growth was already a concern, and the ECB is not in a great position
July 26–27, 2016
114 of 283
to respond to it. The step-down in demand will pose challenges to European banks, which have
struggled with low capital ratios and stagnant earnings, and to the ECB’s attainment of its
inflation target. Italian banks, as has been noted earlier, are a particular concern, as a decade and
a half of poor macroeconomic performance has led to a large rise in nonperforming loans. The
combination of EU requirements of private debt bail-ins and a significant and vocal number of
retail investors in the Italian bank debt makes the recapitalization process very complicated.
Prior to the leave vote, the ECB was already struggling to meet its inflation target, and
the fragile position of European banks appears to be limiting the ECB’s policy options by
reducing the attractiveness of further reductions in short rates or further flattening of the yield
curve. Beyond the immediate hit to economic growth, the leave vote also ushers in a period of
uncertainty that could see bouts of financial volatility associated with the negotiations or political
events in other European countries.
It’s also worth noting that China remains another prominent locus of global downside
risks. While the recent data provide reassurance on near-term economic growth and capital
outflows, risks over the medium term are likely continuing to build. Much of the near-term
boost to the economy appears to have been provided by a large policy-induced jump in debt
growth, which is a worrying development in an economy with an uncomfortably high corporate
debt-to-GDP ratio. There has also been little coherence in plans to reduce capacity in stateowned enterprises, which is necessary for successful rebalancing. And China’s monetary policy
and exchange rate framework remain extremely opaque and subject to considerable discretion,
with the currency recently depreciating noticeably against both the dollar and the designated
basket of currencies despite a stated commitment that targets stability against the basket.
July 26–27, 2016
115 of 283
Together, negative surprises in China and Europe pose risks to the United States through
weaker demand, heightened volatility, and exchange rate appreciation. And, as was highlighted
in two presentations earlier, dollar movements and reactions to surprises have been quite
elevated in recent months, and the feed-through to the U.S. outlook has been very material.
Pulling all of these pieces together, I, like Governor Powell, believe that additional data
will be very important in assessing how much slack remains and how responsive inflation is
likely to be to rising resource utilization as we also assess how resilient our economy is to
downside risks beyond our borders. When uncertainty about the cyclical position of the
economy is relatively large, as it appears to be at present, the chances of policy settings being
either too accommodative or too tight are higher, which puts a high premium on being attentive
to the balance of risks. With risks skewed to the downside and with less conventional policy
space to deal with adverse shocks than with upside shocks, the costs of adjusting policy in
anticipation of favorable data are likely greater than waiting to remove the accommodation until
the data provide a higher level of certainty that such a policy adjustment is warranted. Of course,
we will return to this topic tomorrow. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President George.
MS. GEORGE. Thank you, Madam Chair. Soft commodity prices have weighed on the
10th District economy, with both employment and wage growth slowing over the past year. In
energy-intensive states, the downturn in the energy sector has spread to other segments of the
local economy. State budgets are making substantial adjustments in response to falling tax
revenue, particularly in states like Wyoming, Oklahoma, and New Mexico. In the ag sector, corn
futures prices have fallen sharply, and cattle prices have continued to decline. The persistent
downturn in the farm economy has continued to drive demand for agricultural loans, and our
July 26–27, 2016
116 of 283
recent Agricultural Finance Databook shows past-due farm loans are starting to trend modestly
higher.
Despite these areas of weakness, the District economy overall continues to grow
modestly. Layoff announcements have abated. Residential construction activity is picking up
outside of energy states, and both our services and manufacturing surveys indicate expanding
activity in June.
For the national economy, incoming data since the previous meeting have largely
supported my economic outlook. The employment report for June suggested that the soft May
number was more noise than signal, and the burst of market uncertainty following the U.K.
referendum vote has largely subsided, even with significant questions remaining. In general, I
continue to expect moderate economic growth and an inflation rate rising toward 2 percent.
Consumers appear well positioned to continue to move the economy forward. Growth in
consumer spending is expected to exceed 4 percent in the second quarter, and consumer
confidence readings for current conditions have remained high in July. Continued improvement
in the labor market should support the consumer, although I do expect some deceleration in the
pace of employment growth that is consistent with an economy at or near full employment.
My staff projects employment growth to average about 150,000 per month for the
remainder of the year, well above the pace of labor force growth. This projection is supported by
the Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City’s Labor Market Conditions indicator, which shows that
although labor market momentum has eased from a high level at the beginning of the year, the
current reading remains well above the historical average. While the outlook for consumption
remains solid, as others have noted, weakness in business fixed investment persists, and in that
regard I appreciated the analysis in the Tealbook box on this topic.
July 26–27, 2016
117 of 283
As I look at the categories of equipment investment, two things stand out to me. First are
the influences related to the energy and agricultural sectors as well as the headwinds faced by the
manufacturing sector that have weighed on equipment investment the past two years. This
shows up clearly in falling equipment investment in mining and oil field machinery, agricultural
machinery, and railroad equipment. The second factor is the notable slowing in the pace of
growth for computer and peripheral equipment. Spending in the remaining equipment
categories, however, is increasing at a pace roughly consistent with past expansions. This
suggests to me that the softness in equipment investment is not broad based but may instead
reflect special factors in those areas.
A weaker path of residential investment is highlighted in the Tealbook’s near-term
outlook, and although I would agree that growth in this category is likely to decelerate, I would
not have categorized the sector as being soft. Residential investment has been the fastestgrowing NIPA component since late 2014. Some recent slowing in single-family permitting
could well reflect a limited amount of land for new development in desired locations, and steady
increases in housing prices suggest demand remains relatively strong. CoreLogic house prices
have increased in the past six months at a pace similar to that in 2015. In addition, home
renovations have been increasing, which is a category that accounts for a large share of
residential investment. Overall, I expect this sector to continue making positive contributions to
GDP growth with ongoing home renovations and steady home sales, which support brokers’
commissions, another substantial component of residential investment.
Finally, I see inflation as consistent with our statutory goal of price stability. Year-overyear, core PCE inflation has increased to 1.6 percent in May, and the core CPI index has
increased 2.3 percent over the past year. In addition, longer-term expectations look consistent
July 26–27, 2016
118 of 283
with our goal. I took note of the special question in the recent Survey of Professional
Forecasters, which asked, “Is your long-run forecast of PCE inflation different from 2 percent by
an amount you consider economically meaningful?” And its follow-up was, if so, explain why.
Responses indicate that 24 of 32 forecasters have a long-run inflation forecast in the vicinity of 2
percent. The 8 forecasters who submitted long-run expectations meaningfully different from 2
percent all had expectations above it and not below. And 6 of those 8 pointed to monetary policy
as the reason for their above-target long-run inflation forecast. I also found the recent release of
the New York Fed’s Survey of Consumer Expectations reassuring, as the median inflation
expectations at the three-year-ahead horizon increased from 2.7 percent in May to 2.9 percent in
June. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Kaplan.
MR. KAPLAN. Thank you, Madam Chair. This year has been a challenging one for the
11th District primarily because of weak oil prices, particularly in the first quarter, as well as a
strong dollar. Job growth during the first quarter was revised down by the Texas Workforce
Commission, which now estimates that it was negative 1.3 percent, annualized. Consistent with
that, we have changed our overall forecast for 2016 job growth for Texas to just ½ percent versus
1.3 percent last year and 3.7 percent in 2014.
Our most recent Texas outlook surveys show some stability in the manufacturing sector
after several months of declines and continued growth in the services sector. Home sales and
prices continue to firm for most major Texas metro areas except Houston. Texas exports through
May year-to-date are down approximately 4 percent, year over year. This is primarily due to,
again, the strong dollar and weak global growth outlook. We think our exports will remain weak
for the remainder of 2016, which is very significant for Texas. We are a large exporter; exports
July 26–27, 2016
119 of 283
are about 16 percent of the state’s GDP, so the weakness is a significant drag. Contacts report
little evidence of wage pressure, at least in our District, other than, as we’ve said before, in
skilled trades, high-tech manufacturing, legal services, construction trades, IT, and so on.
In the energy sector, with substantial cuts to rig count and capital spending over the past
two years, U.S. oil production is estimated at approximately 8½ million barrels per day in the
month of July. This is down approximately 10 percent from a year earlier. Despite that decline,
global oil production actually is going to be modestly higher for 2016, because OPEC production
is expected to rise due, importantly, to increases in production in Iran and Iraq. So 2016 will be
up over 2015, but the rate of increase has slowed.
We continue to expect global supply and demand to move into rough balance during the
first half of 2017, on the basis of our expectation of increasing demand of approximately
1.3 million barrels a day, on average, in 2016. It’s been our view that the recent uptick in prices
may have been overdone because of temporary production outages in Nigeria and Canada.
Those outages have now been substantially restored, so we’re not surprised by the recent
reduction in oil prices. However, on the basis of the expected trend toward balance in terms of
global supply and demand, we do continue to expect oil prices to firm as we head into year-end
and into next year. With this firming, we’ve now been seeing in the past few months, for the
first time in 18 months, some very modest oil rig count increases. This activity is primarily in
the Permian Basin, in which breakeven costs are the most attractive.
We still expect, though, that rig increases will be very limited over the next several
months because, on the basis of our discussions with our contacts and our new energy survey, we
continue to think that breakeven prices for new drilling still range between $50 to $60 per barrel
in the most attractive fields in the Permian and higher in other fields. So we still are not yet at a
July 26–27, 2016
120 of 283
market price that allows people to drill and make a profit. As a result of this and the fact that
many industry participants are highly leveraged, we continue to expect to see more mergers,
bankruptcies, and restructurings in this industry for the remainder of the year. And, in the
service sector, we wouldn’t be surprised to continue to see more job losses.
For the next few years, because of very high levels of capacity utilization in OPEC, the
U.S. shale industry is likely to provide the short-cycle supply increases needed to meet growing
global demand, mainly because, as we’ve said before, long-lived project investments have been
relatively dormant for the past two, two and a half years. So we’re more optimistic that we will
have some tailwind as we head into 2017 and beyond.
Turning to the national forecast, we do believe we’re making progress toward reaching
our dual-mandate objectives. Labor market slack has continued to be reduced, and we believe
we are making gradual progress toward meeting our inflation objective. The Federal Reserve
Bank of Dallas trimmed mean 12-month reading is holding steady at 1.8 percent versus
approximately 1.65 percent a year ago, which to us is consistent with gradual, although modest,
increases in core inflation.
We believe the recent deceleration in the pace of job growth is consistent with a labor
market approaching full employment. So we see the average of 150,000 per month that we’ve
experienced the past few months as not surprising and still, as has been said, consistent with
continuing reductions to the unemployment rate. Our own forecast is that the unemployment
rate is going to reach approximately 4.6 percent by the second quarter of 2017.
We continue to estimate 2016 real GDP growth in the United States at approximately
2 percent. For us, the risk in our forecast is actually modestly to the upside. Although Brexit
may have muddied the waters for the United Kingdom and the euro area, and it will take time to
July 26–27, 2016
121 of 283
assess the ultimate effects, our working assumption is that the effect on the United States is
going to be very limited. Discussions we had with our industry contacts in the United States
suggest that the consumer is solid and stable—not better than that, but certainly solid and stable.
We note, by the way, that despite Brexit, junk-bond spreads have narrowed in the intermeeting
period, and, in fact, real household wealth likely turned up in the second quarter, all things
netted out.
As has been mentioned, we keep a close eye on and do our own models of the neutral
rate. We note that slower five-year economic growth expectations as well as growing demand
for safe assets around the world are drivers of recent declines in world interest rates, which are
consistent with declines in our internal estimates of the real neutral rate. As a result, we believe
that the FOMC is less accommodative, even at 25 to 50 basis points than is widely believed.
I’d like to make one more comment on business investment. On the basis of extensive
discussions with our contacts, we assess that while people are pleased with their debt borrowing
costs—and, if they are public companies, with their stock prices—most business leaders we
speak to fear that we are in for a prolonged period of sluggish GDP growth both in the United
States and across advanced economies. In addition, they see, as I’ve said before, very high levels
of disruption in their respective industries—either new entrants that are threatening their model
or, at a minimum, consumers having greater leverage that is limiting their pricing power and
lowering margins. The result of this is that CEOs are very hesitant to make major additions to
capital spending plans or capacity additions until they see some greater clarity regarding their
future growth prospects. And, we are finding this pretty broadly across contacts in our District.
Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Harker.
July 26–27, 2016
122 of 283
MR. HARKER. Thank you, Madam Chair. Overall economic activity in the Third
District is little changed from June. But looking ahead, things appear to be on the upswing.
Employment growth has slowed a bit, and the unemployment rate ticked up to 5.3 percent in
May. Comparing labor force developments in my region with those of the nation, the Third
District continues to grow a bit more slowly than the nation, but that’s not unusual. We
typically do.
The manufacturing sector continues to struggle a bit, but expectations in the business
community remain fairly upbeat: Of the firms surveyed in our latest Business Outlook Survey,
46 percent expect an increase in activity over the next six months, while only 12 percent
anticipate a decline. Also, a large majority of firms reported stable employment in July. Now, a
contact with broad exposure in manufacturing indicated that a number of lines of business are
beginning to see profits turn positive, with July being the best month of his year. Growth is
strong in transportation, health care, and areas associated with construction. And he reports there
have been no negative effects from “the Kamin,” we’ll call it, as he walks out of the room
[laughter], formerly known as “the Brexit.” Even in his businesses that deal heavily with
Europe, he’s not seeing any real effect. Another contact indicated that the British arm of a major
flooring company is reporting stronger growth as a result of the Brexit vote. However, one of
our bankers indicated that a major multinational firm in our District is starting to lay people off,
and the excuse it gave was that, because of the Brexit result, it started to see some slowdown in
its business. Who knows whether that is true, but that’s what it is reporting.
Bankers in our region are experiencing strong loan growth and high profitability as well
as a continued decline in delinquencies. Residential investment is strong in the Philadelphia
area, and the Jersey Shore is absolutely booming. Although these numbers will not excite
July 26–27, 2016
123 of 283
President Williams, beachfront property on Long Beach Island, New Jersey, is going for upward
of $4 million to $5 million. I know, that’s a condo in San Francisco.
MR. WILLIAMS. A lean-to. [Laughter]
MR. HARKER. A supplier of homebuilding materials has seen a 60 percent increase in
business during the second quarter. And, as others have reported, for difficult-to-find workers
such as truck drivers, this one contact says his firm has raised wages three times this year alone
to try to find truck drivers. That said, a number of contacts did mention that the uncertainty
arising from this year’s presidential election was damping their capital spending for the second
half of this year and possibly into 2017.
Nonmanufacturing activity in the District continues to grow modestly at a somewhat
slower-than-historical rate. Readings are a bit mixed, as we are seeing declining activities at
malls but very strong growth in tourism and hospitality. The DNC helped that, by the way, this
week. Like our manufacturers, area service providers remain relatively optimistic with respect to
future activity. Further, commercial construction has begun to pick up in the region, which
makes us an outlier nationally. Also, the value of residential contracts continues on a steady
upward trend, although permits continue to fall, mostly as a result of weakness in the multifamily
sector of the market. House prices are appreciating at a modest pace, growing at less than half
the U.S. average. So, overall, the Third District should see steady, if unspectacular, economic
growth, and contacts are generally upbeat about the future.
Turning to the nation as a whole, the latest employment report greatly allayed my
concerns over the underlying strength in the labor market. Averaging through the past few
months indicates that job growth has decelerated from earlier in the year, but that the economy is
still creating jobs at a healthy clip. In light of the tightness in the labor market, I also believe that
July 26–27, 2016
124 of 283
a gradual slowdown in job creation is, as many have said, to be expected. My other concern over
the potential destabilizing influence of Brexit, as others have noted, has not materialized. If
anything, financial markets have shown amazing resiliency, and it is still not clear if and when
actual Brexit will occur.
Overall, I view the data we have received since we last met as reassuring. Consumer
spending and residential real estate are contributing to economic growth, the job market has
retained its dynamism, and core inflation numbers appear to be heading toward our target. I
anticipate that headline inflation will follow and that the economy will grow at or slightly above
trend. In that regard, I’m a bit more optimistic than the staff in the Tealbook. Now, some of my
optimism is informed by my greater reliance on GDPplus rather than expenditure GDP, or
simply GDP, as a measure of underlying economic activity. This latent variable is calculated by
the staff at the Philadelphia Fed and combines GDP and GDI using a Kalman filter.
Interestingly, the staff finds that GDPplus does not suffer from the residual seasonality problem
and is a better predictor of GDP than GDP itself. Further, real-time forecasts of GDPplus are
more informative about future GDP than our current real-time estimates of GDP itself. This
suggests that current GDPplus contains valuable information about underlying economic activity
as well as about future revised BEA estimates of GDP. The current estimate we have for firstquarter GDPplus growth is 2.7 percent, and this measure indicates that there was no fourthquarter economic slowdown. Also, using GDPplus as a gauge of first-quarter economic activity
substantially attenuates the puzzling weakness in labor productivity. My somewhat optimistic
outlook will inform my view on policy tomorrow. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Let me suggest at this point, for good behavior, we take
a short break—maybe 20 minutes. I think coffee and refreshments are available outside.
July 26–27, 2016
125 of 283
[Coffee break]
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay, let’s get started. Our next speaker is Governor Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Thank you, Madam Chair. As everybody has pointed out, the
significant short-term downside risks that loomed over the June meeting have largely dissipated,
although I don’t think that means that we’ve reverted to the situation we were in, say, in
mid-May. I think Jay did a very nice job of identifying several of the reasons why that’s the
case. First, there’s been a slowing in the job creation numbers. I don’t know why we think that
necessarily we’ve slowed and now plateaued at 150,000. It seems to me there’s at least an open
question as to whether that trend line will continue to be down or whether it will plateau at
150,000. Second, while longer-term Treasury securities have retraced some of the decline in the
immediate aftermath of Brexit, they didn’t get all the way back. This may be due, at least in
part—as I think people have already suggested—to changes in the expected path of monetary
policy both here and abroad, which is in turn associated with somewhat less-sanguine
expectations for economic growth. Those anticipated changes probably have also contributed to
the rebound in asset prices. And third, Governor Powell mentioned Brexit, but I want to invoke
David Wilcox’s formulation here, which seems to me the right way to look at it. Back in June
we regarded Brexit, depending on the individual, as a somewhat unlikely outcome, but that if
there was such an outcome, bad things could happen from it. We were implicitly putting a
discount factor on the likelihood that there would be Brexit. But now Brexit is probably a
reality, and so those potential bad things coming out of Brexit now have to be evaluated as real
risks rather than one of the different layers of contingencies. We don’t know what the magnitude
of the negative effects will be, but I think it’s hard to argue that the sign is going to be anything
but negative.
July 26–27, 2016
126 of 283
With the dissipation of the immediate downside risks, I thought it was a good moment to
reflect on the risks associated with the policy approach that I personally have been taking. This
is on the theme of having an open mind. Obviously, none of us, I hope, has an entirely open
mind, meaning no priors, no ways of looking at things. But I think that we all have to be careful
not to fall into defending positions that we’ve taken, like a debater or a litigator, using whatever
evidence is available to defend that position—as if you’re just trying to get a particular outcome
for a client or in front of bunch of judges in a debating tournament—and to think more about
being a policymaker who is trying to absorb changes and, thus, change one’s own position. And,
in all honesty, I actually think the Committee structure we’ve got makes it harder to do that
because it pushes us a little bit into staking out positions that we then defend. So I thought I
would try, with myself, to think through what the risks may be to the approach that I’ve been
taking when thinking about monetary policy decisions. It won’t be surprising to anticipate the
conclusion that I don’t currently find those risks significant—and I’ll explain why in a minute—
but at least it helped me think about what things might change that should, in turn, force me to
change the position I’ve been taking on monetary policy. And, thus, it was a useful exercise.
Plus, by explaining it, it gives people an opportunity to explain why they think the risks are
actually somewhat greater.
To recapitulate what I’ve said before, my basic approach is that I would prefer to wait for
more convincing evidence that inflation will get to, and then remain around, the 2 percent target
before we raise rates further. Basically, I have three reasons for taking this approach. First, so
long as the price-stability side of the dual mandate is not in danger of being breached on the
upside, it’s important to take to heart the statutory injunction that we seek maximum
employment, not some sort of constructed view of full employment. Second, due to the
July 26–27, 2016
127 of 283
asymmetry of the policy tools currently available to us for tightening and for loosening, we
should err on the side of an accommodative policy to avoid increasing—even if only
incrementally—the vulnerability of the economy to some shock, anticipated or unanticipated,
that would be effected by an additional rate increase. And, third, in light of recent experience of
persistently below-target inflation and the possibility that secular forces will make it more
difficult to reach and maintain inflation of around 2 percent, it seems reasonable to wait for
clearer evidence that the target will be reached. So at least the first and second of these reasons
rest on the expectation that we’ll have ample time to react if and as inflation were to move
upward in a way that threatened the target on the upside. I want to focus in particular on the risk
that this expectation may prove to be ill founded.
But, first, I wanted to address financial-stability risks briefly. As I made clear in our
previous discussions, I’m not opposed in principle to the notion that, in some relatively unusual
circumstances, short-term rates may need to be raised in order to diminish risks to financial
stability that may be associated with a broad range of asset prices moving well above historical
averages due to increasing amounts of leverage. And, as I noted earlier, I hope that in thinking
through possible longer-range frameworks for monetary policy, we will at least explore the
development of other financial stability tools. For the present, though, a rate increase is the most
obvious such tool that can be used among monetary policy tools to try to stave off adverse
financial stability effects.
I agree that the conditions in which one would worry about financial stability are more
likely to develop in an environment in which interest rates have remained very low for a long
time. But even if these conditions were to occur, one would want to do a careful assessment of
the relative risk to the economy of tightening versus the risk to the economy stemming from a
July 26–27, 2016
128 of 283
painful and possibly rapid deleveraging if prices and leverage continue to rise well above
sustainable levels. And, more to the immediate point, I don’t think the conditions that I
hypothesized a moment ago are with us today. It is true that CRE markets in six or seven socalled gateway cities do present grounds for concern. It’s also true that the inventory of
leveraged loans held by a variety of financial intermediaries may yet return significant losses and
have some negative macroeconomic effects. And one might argue the case that equity markets
are overvalued. But I think it’s very hard to make a case, looking at the economy as a whole,
that we have a wide range of unusually high asset prices supported by large amounts of leverage,
which would present an appropriate case for a monetary policy rate increase as opposed to either
supervisory actions, regulatory actions, seeing if markets calm down, and engaging in that risk–
reward assessment I suggested a moment ago. Moreover, the greatest risks that may be present
are more weighted in smaller banks and nonbank intermediaries rather than in the large banks,
whose strength or weakness is still an important determinant of the overall stability of the
financial system as a whole. So, again, I agree with the proposition that we ought to keep
financial stability considerations in front of us, but I also agree with those who have said the
threshold should be pretty high for a policy rate increase. And I think one would need to see a
much broader range of asset price concerns than those in a couple of discrete areas.
Turning now to inflation, for the purposes of my remarks today I don’t want to focus on
the likelihood that, in the absence of interest rate increases, core PCE inflation does get back to
and stay around 2 percent. As I noted earlier, that’s an important question, and no matter where
we began, I think we’re all having to give a little bit more credence to secular stagnation
arguments than maybe we did 6 or 12 or 18 months ago. But whatever answer you give to that
question really doesn’t implicate the riskiness of the overall approach to monetary policy I
July 26–27, 2016
129 of 283
suggested a moment ago. A steady and apparently sustainable move of inflation upward would
allow even the most patient of us time to react. And because it seems unlikely that r* is very
large right now, we wouldn’t have to go very far before reaching a neutral or even a
contractionary rate.
The risk that’s most salient to the monetary policy approach that I’ve been taking is that
inflation would start moving up sufficiently rapidly as to put the Committee “behind the curve.”
And, as I understand the position of some on the Committee, the real fear is that it would force
us to raise rates so sharply as to induce a recession. The scenario that seems to lie behind that
fear is that we undershoot the natural rate by so much that inflation either jumps well above
2 percent fairly quickly or that it’s put on a trajectory in that direction. In either case, the
concern is that significant, fairly rapid increases in rates would be necessary to bring it back
down to 2 percent. Now, I’d note in passing, I think this scenario must also embed a hypothesis
that inflation expectations either don’t play the role that the majority of this Committee has
assigned them or that those expectations become unanchored to the upside very quickly, despite
the fact that recent experience suggests that the risk of expectations becoming unanchored have
been toward the downside.
One of the reasons I’ve resisted the policy implications of this scenario, at least at the
present time, is that I think the natural rate may be lower than estimated by the staff, in which
case even if the dynamic of the scenario has validity, it wouldn’t kick in until unemployment was
lower than would be suggested under current assumptions. This gets us back to the question of
how much slack remains in the labor market, how much trend labor force participation is
sensitive to overall luck, labor market conditions, and related issues. I suspect that differences in
views among the Committee on these matters will persist, based probably on everybody’s own
July 26–27, 2016
130 of 283
priors, well beyond the time that we have to act or not act. So I’m not sure that that’s going to be
a convincing argument one way or the other.
A second reason I haven’t found this scenario compelling is that for it to play out, the
Phillips curve would not only have to be somewhat steeper than the slope it has maintained for
the past 20 or so years, but it would also probably have to be notably nonlinear so that the move
through full employment resulted in a fairly quick, fairly sizable increase in price inflation.
While this is, of course, possible, and there is at least some empirical work suggesting the
possibility of nonlinearity of the Phillips curve in some circumstances, there don’t seem to be
compelling reasons to believe that it would suddenly and significantly steepen in the
circumstances of an economy running, at most, moderately above trend and with the increasing
evidence that the flat slope of the Phillips curve has been persistent across time in the United
States and has been similarly flat in most of the world’s major economies.
Third, I am not sure that there really are a lot of precedents for the negative scenario that
people have in mind in wanting to raise rates, if I can put it this way, a little bit preemptively,
although I know that’s not the way people would put it themselves. First off, the problems of the
1960s and 1970s—which almost present the classic case of the FOMC slamming on the brakes
and not being able to engineer a soft landing but, instead, inducing a recession—didn’t just
spring up overnight. They were years in the making. For the more recent experiences, in the
2000s, although the Federal Reseve may bear some of the blame for the financial crisis and the
Great Recession, I don’t think you can make the case that the financial crisis and the Great
Recession were catalyzed by FOMC funds rate increases because of waiting around too long to
act. There are obviously, as President Lacker would suggest, debates we should have, and we
can all have debates, but I think it’s hard to make that case. It was surely not the classic kind of
July 26–27, 2016
131 of 283
central bank-induced recession. I also think the recession of the early 2000s is a murkier picture.
First, it was a very mild recession. Second, I think you can make a pretty good case that it was a
byproduct of the bursting of the tech bubble, which may have had something to do with
preexisting monetary policy, I would acknowledge. But, again, it doesn’t present that classic
case. So I think those precedents are limited in their applicability to where we are now.
Finally, as I noted in the previous meeting, the unemployment rate has been more or less
steady for nearly a year now, during which time the economy has continued to create jobs well
above even a generous estimate of the number of new entrants in the labor force. So, stipulating
for a moment that we should act before we undershoot by too much the natural rate—which,
again, for purposes of argument, I’ll stipulate is at about the current level—right now we’re
clearly not racing past the natural rate. If the unemployment rate were to begin moving down
again in a nontransitory fashion, the reasoning that lies behind this scenario would, at least in my
judgment, be stronger whether or not I became completely convinced after taking account of the
Phillips curve and some of the other factors that I mentioned a moment ago.
In conclusion, I don’t want to suggest, now or at any time, that there’s no risk in the
monetary policy approach that I’ve been taking. Indeed, anyone who thinks his or her policy
preference carries no risks or costs is almost surely wrong. And, in the current circumstances, I
think it’s particularly incumbent on those of us subscribing to a more patient approach to
continue to evaluate how changing conditions might increase those risks and, thus, might affect
the calculus of when the right time for another rate increase has come about. For the moment,
though, it seems to me, at least, that the risk of a rapid, significant undershoot of the natural rate
taking place before we can react and leading to nontransitory, above-target inflation seems quite
July 26–27, 2016
132 of 283
modest. And financial stability vulnerabilities also seem to me well short of the kind of
pervasiveness that would warrant a monetary policy action.
I have a feeling there’s not going to be too much doubt about what I’ll say about my
preferred monetary policy stance tomorrow, but I will leave that until tomorrow, Madam Chair.
Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Mester.
MS. MESTER. Thank you, Madam Chair. You may have heard a loud cacophony
coming from the Cleveland District in the intermeeting period. [Laughter] It was actually a big
sigh of relief. The Cavaliers finally won the NBA championship, Cleveland’s first national
sports championship in 52 years; national employment rebounded strongly in June; financial
markets calmed down fairly quickly after the vote of the U.K. referendum; and the political
conventioneers finally got out of Dodge.
Overall, economic conditions in the Fourth District have changed little during this
intermeeting period, save for indications of building price pressures. The Bank’s diffusion index
of business contacts reporting better versus worse conditions rose from plus 9 at the time of our
previous meeting to plus 18, a reading consistent with the moderate pace of economic growth
we’ve been seeing. In a special staff survey, the vast majority of District contacts reported that
they don’t expect any consequential effect on their firms from the United Kingdom’s vote to
leave the European Union, and even among exporters, fewer than 20 percent expect any effect.
Labor markets in the District remain healthy, with further signs of tightening. Firms
increasing employment outnumber those reducing it, and the Cleveland Federal Reserve staff
estimates that year-over-year growth in payrolls remained at 1.2 percent in June, the same as in
April. The District’s unemployment rate has remained low and stable, estimated at 5.1 percent in
July 26–27, 2016
133 of 283
June. Nearly all District contacts reported some upward pressure on wages. Notably, this was
reported even in some sectors, like manufacturing, in which job growth has not been particularly
strong. Higher wages are increasingly being reported for entry-level positions.
The Cleveland staff’s diffusion index for prices received had been gradually moving up
since the beginning of the year, but it more than doubled over this intermeeting period to its
highest reading in two years, since the start of the survey. In the survey, 43 percent of
respondents across a set of industries that includes construction, retail, and energy reported
increasing prices, all at least modestly.
Turning to the national economy, my outlook for the U.S. economy over the medium run
is little changed since our previous meeting. Once again, the resiliency of the U.S. economy
stands out for me. At the time of our previous meeting, the upcoming vote on the U.K.
referendum loomed large, and we had a very weak May employment report in hand. The
outcome of the U.K. vote was a surprise and generated considerable volatility in financial
markets. Since the vote, financial markets have calmed, and financial conditions are now more
accommodative than they were at the time of our June meeting. Of course, we will be living
with heightened political and economic uncertainty for a while as the United Kingdom and
Europe establish the terms of their new relationship, but it’s gratifying to see that the worst-case
scenarios that had been contemplated have, so far, been avoided.
The jobs report showed a sizable rebound for May, which was even more disappointing
than originally estimated. The rebound allayed concerns among some that we were at the start of
a reversal of the considerable progress that has been made in labor markets, and it was another
reminder that monthly data can be volatile. I’m not saying we should ignore the monthly reports,
only that we need to be somewhat careful not to read too much into any one report, and we have
July 26–27, 2016
134 of 283
to assess conditions on the basis of a broad set of indicators. For labor markets, those include
claims for unemployment insurance and the unemployment rate, which are low, and the rates of
job openings, hiring, and quits, which are high.
Averaging through the past three months, as many people have indicated, monthly
payroll gains have averaged 147,000 per month. This is a deceleration from the
200,000 monthly average seen in the first quarter, but it’s above current estimates of the pace of
job growth consistent with stable labor utilization. The Tealbook estimates this to be roughly
85,000 jobs per month. Across several models that take into account the aging of the population
and other demographic factors affecting labor force participation, the estimates range from about
75,000 to 120,000 per month, with the most recent estimates in the lower part of or even below
that range. For example, in the Cleveland staff model, the estimated trend pace of job gains is
about 120,000 per month. The CBO currently estimates average monthly payroll growth of
75,000 over 2021 to 2026. Some relatively recent research done by Cleveland Federal Reserve
economists puts it between 50,000 and 85,000, and a more recent study by Chicago Federal
Reserve economists estimates trend monthly payroll employment growth to be about 50,000 now
and rising to about 70,000 by 2020.
In any case, the current pace of job growth, though slower than earlier in the year, is
sufficient to generate further increases in labor utilization, provided labor force participation
behaves roughly as anticipated. I think this is a point worth emphasizing. We’ll have two
employment reports before our next meeting. It seems fairly likely that the next report won’t
match June’s outsized increase of 287,000 jobs. It could be quite a bit lower and below analysts’
estimates. This poses a communications issue for us. Without the context, the headlines could
July 26–27, 2016
135 of 283
be quite negative when in fact the pace is consistent with further improvement in the labor
market.
Current estimates indicate a rebound in GDP growth in the second quarter, back to a pace
at or slightly above trend, with consumers leading the way but business investment remaining
weak. The increase in oil prices has started to bring some investment activity in the energy
sector back online. However, the slowdown in investment has been broader, and it does pose a
risk to longer-run potential economic growth.
Like President Williams and President Lacker, I noticed that the Board staff had made a
fairly large downward revision to their forecast of residential investment growth for this year. In
contrast, I haven’t revised my outlook for the housing sector since the previous meeting. I
continue to expect moderate growth in residential investment. This is consistent with other
private-sector forecasters. Single-family building permits rose in June and are moderately higher
than a year ago. Sales of both new and existing homes have been moving higher, and we’ve
been receiving positive reports on current and future housing activity from a District contact who
is a large provider of coating materials to the national housing market. Mortgage rates are
expected to remain low. The most recent Senior Loan Officer Opinion Survey indicated a
pickup in mortgage loan demand. And while residential real estate lending standards remain
tight, standards for GSE-eligible loans are easier than they’ve been, on average, since 2005. In
addition, the Board staff estimates the annual NIPA revisions will show a higher level of
residential investment last year than originally estimated. Perhaps this will result in a higher
growth rate for last year, too, offsetting a slower rate this year.
I view the inflation outlook as largely unchanged since our previous meeting and
consistent with inflation gradually rising back to our 2 percent goal over time, with some ups and
July 26–27, 2016
136 of 283
downs along that path. This seems like a reasonable forecast, reflecting my expectation that
economic growth will continue to be at or slightly above trend, that the unemployment rate will
fall below estimates of this longer-run trend, and that inflation expectations have been and will
continue to be reasonably stable. I note that the troubling dip in inflation expectations seen in the
preliminary June Michigan survey was revised away in the final numbers. We might see
headline inflation move down in the immediate term, due to the drop in food prices and residual
seasonality, but a gradual upward climb back to our goal seems reasonable to me, conditional on
the outlook. When you look at the trajectory of inflation over the past year, you see that we have
indeed made progress as the earlier declines in energy prices and the effects of the sharp dollar
appreciation have been passing through. Both headline and core measures of inflation have
gradually moved up since last fall. I think we should take some comfort in that trajectory.
In thinking about appropriate monetary policy, I’m guided by the medium-run outlook
and risks associated with that, as well as the progress we have made and future progress we
anticipate making on our two monetary policy goals. I think we’re basically at our goal of
maximum employment from the standpoint of what we can do with monetary policy. And even
if there’s some uncertainty associated with that, I think it’s pretty clear that we’re close to that
goal. Inflation remains below our goal, but here, too, we’ve been moving in the right direction.
Forecasts, including the Tealbook and the Cleveland Federal Reserve staff model, show the
unemployment rate moving down and inflation moving up, even as the federal funds rate rises
gradually over the forecast horizon.
While there are downside risks to the forecast, those have subsided somewhat since our
previous meeting. The worst-case scenarios after the U.K. referendum were not realized, and
fears about employment were allayed after the June report. There are also upside risks to the
July 26–27, 2016
137 of 283
forecast. I found the alternative scenario “Weaker Productivity with Higher Inflation” a good
illustration of the type of upside risk we should not ignore. In this simulation, the policy rate
path needs to be considerably steeper than the one we are anticipating. In addition longer-term
yields on Treasuries are down since the start of the year, but the Board staff estimates about twothirds of the decline reflects lower term premiums, while one-third represents lower average
expected future short rates. The lower term premiums represent an easing in financial conditions
that should be supportive of economic activity and, if sustained, is an upside risk to the forecast.
That said, I don’t believe we are “behind the curve” yet with respect to monetary policy.
In my view, the gradual upward path of policy, as indicated in our FOMC communications and
in the June SEPs, continues to be appropriate. No one’s talking about the need to sharply raise
interest rates. What’s left to talk about is timing. It reminds me of that old joke that ends:
“We’ve established what you are, Madam, now it’s just a matter of haggling over the price.”
So if we continue to communicate that a gradual upward path is appropriate, then at some
point we will need to take another step on the path. Of course, if we no longer think such a path
is appropriate, then it’s incumbent on us to say that.
Now, it could very well be that we are in a new economic environment with low
equilibrium real rates that will last for a long time, meaning that the same level of the funds rate
is less accommodative than in the past. And the policy trajectory may need to be even more
shallow than we think. But the anticipated gradual policy rate path takes this possibility into
account and allows for recalibration along the way. It recognizes that there are large error bands
around the SEP forecasts regarding the economy and the policy rate path, even if we, as a
Committee, can’t agree to show those confidence bands to the public. But even if r* is low, it
July 26–27, 2016
138 of 283
isn’t a situation that supports maintaining the funds rate at 25 to 50 basis points indefinitely, even
as we continue to make progress on our goals.
I continue to believe monetary policy should be forward looking. Trying to purposely
drive the economy to overheat in an attempt to generate a faster return to 2 percent inflation and
a cyclical rebound in labor force participation seems ill advised and risky. I can’t point to any
historical examples of central banks pursuing this strategy that have ended well. I think it
overestimates our ability to control things, and it seems inconsistent with a gradual policy rate
path. It seems more likely that it would require an L-shaped path, low for long and then steeper
thereafter. So I really couldn’t support pursuing that strategy.
At some point, conditional on the outlook and associated risks, we will need to raise the
funds rate. And then, consistent with the gradual path, we can take some time to assess the
situation. The gradual path doesn’t anticipate increases at each FOMC meeting. Indeed, I recall
we settled on the language of “gradual path” to dissuade the public from thinking that once we
started, we expected to move at every meeting. If the medium-run outlook changes significantly,
then we can hold rates there for a while or even reverse course. I wouldn’t view that as an error,
just as I don’t view December’s increase as an error, even though we haven’t raised the rate since
then. The exact timing and ultimate policy rate path are data dependent, meaning they depend on
how economic conditions, the outlook, and the risks to the outlook are evolving. This is the
nature of policymaking when the future is uncertain. But that’s nothing new—the future is
always uncertain. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Evans.
MR. EVANS. Thank you, Madam Chair. On balance, the reports from my directors and
other business contacts were somewhat more upbeat this round. The commentary still seemed in
July 26–27, 2016
139 of 283
line with the roughly 2 percent economic growth we’ve seen for some time. But whereas my
contacts before were only hopeful that they would achieve their 2016 business plans, now they
have more confidence that they will actually meet these goals. Among the positive reports this
round, my director who heads Motorola Solutions reported an increase in his order backlog and a
better outlook from a variety of customers. Regarding President Williams’s comments on
housing, several other directors pointed to improved residential construction, with one noting a
change in the composition of activity from multifamily to single-family units. My director from
Commonwealth Edison reported stronger usage across its customer base and noted that it was
hiring to meet increased demand for new connections, and residential is a large part of that.
More generally, my contact at Manpower Employment Services described increasing labor
demand and a modest pickup in nominal wage growth, consistent with a tightening labor market.
He noted that the pickup in wages extended beyond just high-skilled workers. Firms in the
services sector have been doing quite well, which is bolstering demand for lower-skilled and
entry-level workers as well. None of my contacts expressed serious concerns about Brexit,
although some said it was too early to tell.
To be sure, not all reports were positive. In particular, most manufacturing firms are still
struggling, and I found President Lacker’s positive comments from the Machine Technology
Association to be very interesting. I look forward to learning more about that. Caterpillar and
Deere continue to note challenges. Business lines related to natural resource extraction and
construction remain soft. It was also noted that their earlier projections for increases in state and
local government infrastructure spending had been slower to materialize than expected. Other
manufacturers had similar stories.
July 26–27, 2016
140 of 283
Turning to my macroeconomic outlook, our GDP forecast is a tad stronger than the
Tealbook’s. We see GDP growth at about 2 percent this year and then a bit stronger in 2017.
Another difference is that we currently think that there’s a little more slack in labor markets than
indicated in the Tealbook. Still, under our forecast, slack is essentially gone by early next year.
The June labor market report and incoming consumer spending data increased our
confidence in this outlook. We also see somewhat stronger investment growth than the
Tealbook, although it’s not gangbusters. This, in part, reflects analysis of a new data source by
my staff. We’ve obtained data from a local firm, Textura, that processes commercial
construction contract payments and budgets. This is one of those new high technologies being
brought to bear on business procedure today. It basically is working with an old construction
payments mechanism in which people put liens on the building every time they finish part of it,
then get paid and take the lien back, and then put another lien on so that somebody won’t fail to
pay you when you’ve done something for them. They now do this digitally and as a
clearinghouse for people, and that’s basically the value proposition. The contracts represent
about 4 percent of total U.S. construction spending, but have a national reach. Our experimental
indicator, on the basis of the budgeting data, appears to provide a six-month lead for predicting
total U.S. construction spending. Right now, on the basis of the data we have, it is pointing to a
modest pickup in construction spending in the second half of the year.
While I’m feeling somewhat better about my projection of economic growth, I still see
the balance of risks as weighted somewhat to the downside, and I remain concerned that the
international situation could deteriorate with attendant movements in the dollar and financial
conditions weighing on spending. I thought Governor Brainard covered that territory extremely
July 26–27, 2016
141 of 283
well. Also, if, for some reason, the U.S. consumer were to falter, I don’t see the other
components of domestic demand picking up the slack.
Turning to inflation, my outlook, again, is close to the Tealbook. I’m projecting 2016
core inflation to be 1.6 percent. Further ahead, I see both core and total inflation moving up
gradually but still falling a bit short of our 2 percent target at the end of 2018. Furthermore, as I
discussed at our previous meeting, I see meaningful downside risks to this forecast. Most
important, inflation compensation in financial markets and survey measures of inflation
expectations continue to bounce along at extremely low levels, and my business contacts still
report no significant inflationary pressures or pricing power to pass along any cost pressures they
actually do face. If we were really going to see a quick return to 2 percent core inflation, I would
expect to see something more bubbling up with these indicators. I hope that these will turn
around as we move through the year, but I remain skeptical. And I agree with Governor
Tarullo’s risk-management assessment regarding upward inflation realizations relative to our
expectations as well as the financial stability risk responses. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Madam Chair. At the June FOMC meeting, I discussed
the St. Louis Fed’s new approach to the macroeconomic outlook. In my remarks today, I plan to
compare that outlook with the July Tealbook to try to better illustrate what the differences
may be.
As you may recall, the Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis’ new approach is based on a
regime conceptualization that does not rely on convergence properties of an economy returning
to a long-run steady state. There are three parts to the current regime, as we view it: number
one, low productivity growth; number two, a very low real return on short-term government
July 26–27, 2016
142 of 283
debt, which we labeled r†; and, three, no recession. To see r†, the staff has kindly provided in
Michael Kiley’s report, exhibit 2, chart 4, the expected real equity return. This shows the staff’s
estimate of the expected 10-year real equity return as well as the expected real yield on the 10year Treasury, with a substantial difference between the two. The expected real return on the
Treasury is negative, as it has been for the past several years on and off. What we’re talking
about is short-term debt, so this would be even lower than the red line in this figure. That’s a big
part of our regime. Also, very helpfully, this picture shows the long-term decline in the red line
from the 1980s. Because this thing’s been declining secularly for a long time, we see no reason
to predict that this is going to suddenly turn up and go to a higher value. Or, if you want to look
at related evidence, I think it would give you the same story here.
As of today, we see no evidence that we have or are likely to switch out of any of the
three elements of the current regime. Real returns to government debt remain exceptionally low,
productivity growth remains exceptionally low, and recession probabilities are low as well. We
therefore think the most appropriate forecast, as most cyclical adjustment is likely over, is that
the U.S. economy will remain in the current regime for the foreseeable future. Anecdotal
evidence from around the Eighth District seems to corroborate this judgment. Accordingly, we
continue to forecast real GDP growth of 2 percent for 2016, 2017, and 2018; fourth-quarter
average unemployment of 4.7 percent for all three years; and trimmed mean inflation of
2 percent for all three years.
Given the regime, the appropriate policy rate supporting this outcome is just 63 basis
points over the forecast horizon. Essentially, because there’s no concept of a long-run steady
state, there’s no requirement that the policy rate begin a long march back to its longer-run
average level. This is true so long as the current regime remains the best description of the
July 26–27, 2016
143 of 283
macroeconomic environment. The July Tealbook, in contrast, has 1.7 percent real GDP growth
for 2016, somewhat lower than us, accelerating to 2½ percent for 2017. Faster growth is just
around the corner. But if you average these two figures, you will get 2.1 percent, approximately
the same as the St. Louis forecast with a bit of difference in timing. Unemployment falls,
according to the Tealbook, but only to 4.6 percent at the end of 2017, almost the same as the
St. Louis forecast. In the Tealbook forecast, inflation rises toward 2 percent only slowly. The
Tealbook baseline uses the new version of the Taylor (1999) policy rule and forecasts a 200-plus
basis point increase in the policy rate to support these outcomes through the end of 2018. This is
just a little less than one move per quarter. In reality, since the end of quantitative easing, we are
moving at a pace closer to once per year. Markets think we may go even slower than this. In my
view, this mismatch is hurting our credibility.
This is the main difference between the Tealbook forecast and the new St. Louis Federal
Reserve approach. In the Tealbook, there’s a long-run steady state to which the economy must
converge. As gaps are closed, the policy rate essentially has to return to its long-run normal
level. This leads to a 200-plus basis point increase in the policy rate over the forecast horizon.
In the regime-based approach, the policy rate can be set for the regime. Gaps can be zero, but
the policy rate can remain low because the regime does not require a high value of the policy rate
in order to remain consistent with the inflation target. Which approach is better? At this
juncture, I think the regime’s [laughter], with low unemployment, allows for a better match
between the policy choices and the policy environment.
What are the risks to this outlook? Although the comments on Brexit have been
extensive, I’m going to comment, nevertheless. I was actually in Europe as Brexit passed,
including in London for part of that trip. My judgment is that the ultimate effects on the United
July 26–27, 2016
144 of 283
States are negligible. This is a trade negotiation that will likely take many years. In my opinion,
the incentives are for both sides to reach a deal eventually. This deal will not be that different
from current arrangements. On the basis of conversations that I had in Europe, it seems that
contagion to other EU members in the east or south of the EU is unlikely. Many of those
countries have their own reasons for wanting to be in the EU and would not likely vote to get
out. Trade negotiations are going on all around the world all the time. One recent example is
Canada, which was in a seven-year negotiation with the EU. I never saw it come up here as a
concern one way or the other or as a positive upside. So I don’t think that this is the kind of
thing that’s going to affect U.S. monetary policy over the near term or in the medium term.
There’s a question of another risk, which would be a stronger dollar post-Brexit. The
current dollar move is relatively small compared with the big dollar move in the second half of
2014. The dollar is actually lower today than it was earlier this year. And, furthermore, I think
the dollar gets overemphasized around this table. The contribution of net exports to the U.S. real
GDP growth, which was discussed earlier, has actually been close to zero over the past four
quarters for which we have data—that is, from 2015:Q2 to 2016:Q1. That zero contribution over
those four quarters is actually stronger than the net export contribution to GDP growth during
2001 to 2007 or during the 1990s expansion. So in terms of contributions to GDP growth, we’re
actually doing better over the past year than we did during the entire 1990s expansion or the
2000s expansion. The zero number is despite the very large trade-weighted dollar move in the
second half of 2014, which was significant, on the order of 15 to 20 percent, and persistent. You
got a big move up and it leveled out, so it was just the kind of experiment that you’d like to see if
you wanted to see a large effect from the exchange rate. There was an effect of the dollar move,
I think, on net exports, but it looks like it was mostly in 2014:Q4 and 2015:Q1. In those two
July 26–27, 2016
145 of 283
quarters, we did get outsized negative contributions of net exports to GDP growth. That period
seems to have borne the brunt.
My anecdotal reports from manufacturers around the Eighth District seem to suggest that
the big dollar move at that point was a big surprise. It did affect their businesses. They did have
to reorganize internationally. But it’s not like they hadn’t thought about this before. They knew
how to go about it. It takes about a year to make adjustments, and it sounds to me like all of
these adjustments have now been made, so you wouldn’t expect further effects from that
particular move in the dollar. As far as a stronger dollar post-Brexit, I don’t see that as a risk.
Furthermore, I think future monetary policy is already priced in, both for the U.S. central bank
and for other major central banks, so I doubt dollar moves are predictable, and I would not count
on them as part of the outlook.
Now, other risks to the regime conceptualization of the U.S. macroeconomy: One is
Phillips curve effects. We’re downplaying Phillips-curve effects. There’s no question about it.
We have a relatively strong labor market over the past couple of years, and yet this doesn’t create
any inflation. It’s very possible that the Phillips curve would reassert itself, but we’re listing that
as a risk to the outlook, not as something that we’re putting into the baseline case. Also, as
several people have mentioned tangentially here, that market-based measures of inflation
expectations are extremely low is a concern. Right now, I’m listing it as a risk to the Federal
Reserve Bank of St. Louis forecast. And, finally, several people here have discussed asset
bubbles. Our approach, frankly, has little to say about this, so we’re just listing that as
something that is outside the model and something that we will have to make a judgment about
at some point in the future. I don’t see asset bubble risk as being heightened at this juncture, but
it is something I may be concerned about at some point in the future. But the approach that
July 26–27, 2016
146 of 283
we’ve written down really has very little to say to help us make a judgment on that dimension.
Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you very much. President Kashkari.
MR. KASHKARI. Thank you, Madam Chair. The Ninth District economy continues to
perform well. Employment has been growing modestly overall, hampered by anecdotes of
ongoing poor labor availability. We often hear that worker scarcity is a problem, that employers
can’t find workers with the skills that they need. And then usually I turn around and ask them,
“Okay. Are you raising wages?” “No. We’re not in a position to do that.” So I take these
anecdotes with a grain of salt. Until we see them raising wages, I don’t take much information
from them.
The national economy continues to grow at a modest pace. The labor market is in good
health overall, but I don’t see any signs of overheating. Rather, on balance, when I look at all of
the data over the past year, it seems to be moving more or less sideways—not huge wage growth,
not employment cost growth, et cetera. I think we’re going to be lucky if we see overall
2 percent GDP growth for 2016 as a whole. On the inflation front, inflation continues to run
below target. I don’t see clear evidence of a sustained move upward toward our 2 percent target.
And, as others have noted, some measures of inflation expectations are worryingly low.
Internationally, I have more concerns. If I just think objectively, developments since our
previous meeting have not been positive. Our base case was “No Brexit.” We had the Brexit, so
that’s a negative even if it wasn’t as bad as we’d feared. We’ve seen fresh strains in global
banks, especially in Italian banks. We saw a potential coup in Turkey. We’ve seen repeated
terrorist attacks. Some of these are not economic events, but they nonetheless affect confidence,
and they’re all tilted to the negative. Now, I hope that the U.S. economy will mostly escape
July 26–27, 2016
147 of 283
these headwinds coming from abroad, but, like the Tealbook, I do continue to see the risks to the
outlook for the real economy and for inflation as tilted to the downside. I don’t see these risks as
having materially diminished since we last met in June.
One other comment I’ll make is that this discussion today makes me think about the
optimal control exercise in Tealbook B. And I struggle with this notion. No one is suggesting
this today, but I struggle with the notion that there may come a time when inflation is low but we
need to get the unemployment rate up. I just struggle with that as not being credible, that we
need to get the unemployment rate up when there’s no inflation immediately on the horizon. I
think that that runs afoul of, really, the mandate that we have been given. So, for me, the optimal
control exercise with the asymmetric weight on the unemployment rate gap is the one that I
found compelling. We say that 2 percent is a target, not a ceiling. If we really mean that, then
we should be as concerned about inflation under target as we are over target. So that’s what’s
governing my thinking as I think through these various options. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Williams.
MR. WILLIAMS. Thank you, Madam Chair. The data since our June meeting
confirmed that the economic expansion is on track. Consumer spending has been notably strong,
supported by a healthy labor market, improving household balance sheets, and still-low gas
prices. More broadly, my forecast is not much different than it was last month, or, for that
matter, from last December when we lifted off. We’ve seen an easing in domestic headwinds
that have been weighing on the economy. Household deleveraging appears to have largely run
its course, and fiscal policy has now turned to being modestly stimulative.
In this regard, I think I’d like to make a comment about the discussion concerning r* and
the increase in the value of the dollar. I don’t disagree with any of the things that are said about
July 26–27, 2016
148 of 283
whether a higher value of the U.S. dollar versus other currencies is like an increase in the fed
funds rate, but let’s be careful not to double-count. My own view that r*, for example, is very
low is in part because of the increase of the dollar. The higher dollar is one of the factors
pushing r* down, at least in the short run, to the levels around zero that Thomas and I estimate.
So I just warn against using both the low-r* story and the story that attributes it to “the increase
in the dollar,” as if we had already raised the funds rate 150 basis points. I think I would just be
cautious that we’re not double-counting.
At our June meeting, uncertainty from the looming Brexit vote was a significant factor
arguing for keeping policy on hold. Although the vote was a surprise, the lasting fallout for the
U.S. economy is likely to be minimal. Indeed, U.S. financial conditions, as many have noted,
are, on balance, more favorable than they were before our June meeting, when they were already
notably more favorable than they were back in December. Short- and longer-term interest rates
have moved lower since our June meeting. Mortgage lending standards are reported to have
eased further for many borrowers, and equity prices have risen to all-time highs. And the broad
trade-weighted dollar is little changed.
In terms of the Brexit risk, I’m going to respond a little bit to what President Kashkari
said. When I thought about the risk, I thought there was maybe a 50–50 chance of Brexit. I’m
sorry, I’m going to keep saying “Brexit” just to drive Steve crazy. [Laughter] I thought that
there was a risk of it happening, and then an uncertainty or huge distribution of what would
happen after that. So when I think of the overall risks, in my mind it was 50–50, and it went
52– 48, voting for “yes.” It is important to say, “Well, what’s happened since then?” And,
personally, I have always viewed the biggest risk as being the political risks regarding Brexit.
There I view the immediate aftermath—when basically every leader in Britain stepped down,
July 26–27, 2016
149 of 283
and there was talk in Europe about rapid activation of Article 50, and all that—as looking like a
bad political risk. But since then, we’ve seen the British government actually quickly form
again, and the leadership, I think, lay out a position of a slow walk in terms of Brexit. And I
think calmer heads have prevailed on the continent politically regarding Brexit, specifically the
chancellor in Germany, who’s made it clear that they want to see this process go more slowly.
So although I’m not going to pretend that the risks aren’t still there, I do think that in a way—so
far, as least—what we’ve seen has been in the less-bad set of possible outcomes.
Although my GDP growth forecast for this year remains close to 2 percent, I think what’s
important, at least from my view, is how to think about what 2 percent means in terms of
characterizing that both in our internal discussions and our external communications. In this
regard, a lot of what I’m about to say is very close to what President Mester said about
employment, but let me start with GDP. As I mentioned last meeting, my own estimate of
potential growth is 1.6 percent, which is basically what the Tealbook has currently, but that’s
also my view on the basis of analysis by our staff of what the longer-run potential growth for the
U.S. economy is, in view of the demographic trends and the slow productivity trend that we
seem to be on. Now, I did test-run this idea that we’re on a slower path of economic growth with
our business contacts, and, in fact, I got very little pushback to this notion. By and large, our
business contacts have seen relatively small productivity gains in recent years. None of them
were predicting a resurgence, and although they all highlight the use of new technologies and are
looking for new ways to increase productivity, the examples they give and the way they talk
about it is about incremental gains in productivity. And, of course, they do argue that
productivity gains are held back by barriers such as compliance, complexity, cybersecurity, and
those kinds of issues.
July 26–27, 2016
150 of 283
Given this assessment of potential—1.6 percent potential growth—in my lexicon,
“moderate growth” is the sustainable trend increase that we should look for, and it’s on the order
of 1½ percent. Now, like the Tealbook, I expect 2 percent growth in the second half of this year,
and that’s an above-trend pace that exceeds my estimate of long-run growth as well as the
Tealbook’s. So to my mind, 2 percent growth is a solid pace of economic growth, and the
economy is on track to exceed potential by a significant amount over the next couple of years.
Similarly, it’s important to recalibrate our thinking and our language regarding
employment growth. I know a number of people have mentioned this, but I just want to reiterate
it. Job gains have continued to be at a well above their steady-state trend. In 2014 and 2015, the
economy added nearly 3 million jobs a year, and this year we are on track to add another
2 million, according to the Tealbook. According to the Tealbook’s estimates—there are a range
of estimates out there, and we’ve already heard about a few of them—trend employment is only
85,000 jobs a month, and that’s about 1 million jobs a year. The excellent staff at the Federal
Reserve Bank of Chicago, in their recent reexamination of this study, suggested that trend
number may be as low as 50,000 jobs per month, or 600,000 per year. Over the first half of this
year, we’ve seen monthly job gains of 172,000 per month, which is double—I’m going to do the
doubling and tripling rule—what the Tealbook thinks of as trend and more than triple that of the
Chicago Fed’s estimate. So I view 170,000 job gains not as “moderate” but as “strong” or even
“robust.” And, in fact, it’s unsustainable, because, due to the limited remaining slack in labor
markets, we should expect the pace of job gains to slow down. And if we don’t see the pace of
job gains slowing down, we will need to raise rates faster than the Committee currently
anticipates.
July 26–27, 2016
151 of 283
Now, there have been notable month-to-month fluctuations in job gains, with June
bouncing back from a weak report in May, but this rebound was largely predictable. Not only
were the May gains out of line with the other indicators—and we talked about that at our
previous meeting—but identifiable transitory factors held down the May number. Those
included the Verizon strike and weather. As I reported last month, my staff looked at countylevel data and found that weather affects employment patterns and had a significant effect,
especially, on May. According to their model, good weather earlier in the spring pulled forward
job gains for May, and when you adjust it for the Verizon strike, job gains in May were about in
the 150,000 range. So this same analysis finds that weather effects had very small effects on the
June employment numbers.
Finally, in terms of inflation, we remain on course to return to 2 percent inflation. Core
inflation was only one- or two-tenths below our objective in the first half of this year, and I’m
now going to respond to something that President Evans said. Obviously, in the first half of the
year there were transitory factors pushing up core inflation. I recognize that. But it is interesting
that we essentially had core inflation of 2 percent, but the anecdotal stories aren’t saying that
inflation is high. So I’m guessing that when we’re at 2 percent underlying inflation, maybe we
would not be hearing about that anecdotally, but, again, I’m not taking a very strong signal in the
first half. I think there are transitory factors. But my overall outlook continues to be one in
which a strong labor market will increase inflationary pressures and bring inflation back to 2
percent.
One of the things that I do regularly to gauge how much confidence I should have in
different measures of inflation is to look at all of the different measures of inflation—we talk a
lot about the trimmed mean and PCE; we talk about CPI. For each of them, we do a process in
July 26–27, 2016
152 of 283
which we basically try to adjust for the different means or trends in the series to make them
comparable. When you look through May at all the different inflation indicators that are
published, adjusted to have the same mean as the core PCE price index, they’re all running about
1½ to 1.8 percent, with 1.6 and 1.7 being right there in the median. So what I find interesting is
that all the inflation measures are telling us the same thing. There doesn’t seem to be a lot of,
shall we say, uncertainty associated with that, and they all have been showing an increase over
the past year.
The last thing I’ll just mention on risks is that I view them as fundamentally balanced. I
do want to comment that, as I think has already been mentioned, perhaps by President Mester,
there are always risks, and I think it’s very hard to find the upside risks in the news. President
Kashkari, the headlines don’t say there wasn’t a bad thing happening today. They’re always
going to say there’s a bad thing happening. And I know we live in a world in which there’s a lot
of tragedy and a lot of news on killings or the coup or things like that, but I don’t know whether
that particularly tells us the risks are greater or less than normal. My own assessment is, we’re
basically at about the normal over the past 20 years, when there’s been a lot of events that
happened during that time, too. Thank you.
MR. KASHKARI. Maybe I’m spending too much time on Twitter. [Laughter.]
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. I could make a comment. It wouldn’t be politic. Thank
you, Madam Chair. As has been the case for some time, my baseline forecast hasn’t changed
much. I think I’m pretty much along with everybody else, expecting the economy to grow at
about a 2 percent pace over the next year or two and that this will lead to payroll employment
July 26–27, 2016
153 of 283
gains sufficient to produce a gradual further tightening in the labor market. This, in turn, should
eventually push inflation back up toward our 2 percent objective.
In terms of the economic growth, I was cheered by the sharp step-up in payroll
employment that we saw in June because it did remove a question mark that existed because of
the weakness in May. Also, I think the pickup in consumer spending growth in the second
quarter is welcome because it confirms our expectation that the high real income gains we saw in
the first quarter were actually going to provide more support for consumer spending. It got
spread out over a little bit longer period.
Nevertheless, I think it’s important not to get too excited about all of this. First,
employment growth and real income growth do appear to be slowing, so the supports that we
have to consumer spending will likely be less positive. And, second, when you look at the rest
of the economy, all the other sectors still have issues. Investment spending has been very soft.
Trade and inventories are likely to be drags on economic growth. And we can debate about
whether the recovery in housing is slowing down, but I think you can generally say it’s been
disappointing—it’s been upward but slow and choppy. Moreover, I do think there’s some risk
that election-year uncertainty could have some negative effects on economic activity this year.
So I’m of the view, more in the “Kashkari camp” than the “Williams camp,” that I think it’s
unlikely that the economy will surprise us on the upside over the next several months, and I do
see some downside risks to growth.
I agree that the initial negative reaction to the Brexit vote evident in the financial markets
was very short lived, but there are still a number of channels by which Brexit could still hurt the
U.S. economy. We obviously know that U.K. growth will slow as a consequence, and I agree
that the direct effect of slower U.K. growth on U.S. trade will almost certainly be very small
July 26–27, 2016
154 of 283
because total U.S. exports to the United Kingdom are only about 0.7 percent of U.S. GDP. But it
seems to me that there are a number of other channels that could amplify the effect of the Brexit
decision on U.S. economic activity, such as the effects on European economic activity and the
perceived health of the global banking system and, potentially, on global financial conditions. If
you remember, as we went through the financial crisis, we had good days, we had good weeks,
and we had good months. And just because the reaction to the Brexit vote outcome has turned
out a little bit more favorably recently, I would not conclude that the story is over yet, especially
when we haven’t really gotten any good evidence about what’s actually happening to U.K.
economic growth.
One potentially detrimental dynamic I see is the effect of lower interest rates and flatter
yield curves on bank profits and equity prices and how this could potentially feed into the
availability of credit. Another is that if we do get more economic weakness than we expect, this
could lead to a loss in business and consumer confidence, reflecting in part the perception that
policymakers may have limited policy options to address that weakness. That’s just a
vulnerability. Weakness could beget more weakness because of a view that authorities around
the world don’t have much in the way of ability to respond. And, as many people mentioned, the
Brexit vote could also increase political uncertainty not just in the United Kingdom, but
elsewhere. I also think some of the socioeconomic issues that led to the Brexit vote outcome,
such as fears about immigration and job security, are also very relevant elsewhere.
So, in my view, it’s too soon to say whether any of these dynamics will materialize, or, if
they do, how consequential that will be. I certainly agree that the situation since the Brexit vote
has evolved in a way better than feared, but at the same time, we can’t forget that the Brexit vote
result nevertheless is a negative shock that I think most of us didn’t really expect to be realized.
July 26–27, 2016
155 of 283
In the statement language, we sort of imply an answer to the question: Are the near-term risks
lower since the previous meeting? And I think that really depends in part on how you weight the
domestic economic news since the previous meeting versus the negative news associated with
Brexit. I think the risks to the outlook have diminished somewhat since the Brexit vote—in
other words, the Brexit effect has been less than anticipated—but I’m not sure the risks have
really diminished meaningfully since the June FOMC meeting.
With respect to inflation, I think the outlook hasn’t changed much either. Headline
inflation, as anticipated, has climbed a bit this year as some of the earlier energy price declines
have fallen out of the calculations. I think core inflation has been broadly stable if we adjust for
the seasonal adjustment problems in the core inflation statistics. And I take some signal from the
fact that core inflation has stayed broadly stable over the past year and a half, even as you had
this downward pressure that you would have thought would be manifesting itself through the
strength of the dollar and lower energy prices. So my view is, inflation will be fine in terms of
moving back toward the 2 percent objective as long as the economic growth that we expect
actually materializes.
In terms of the inflation expectations issue that I’ve highlighted before in past comments,
I think in general I’m a little bit less worried now than I was earlier. The University of Michigan
measure has stabilized, and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York three-year-ahead inflation
measure has been gradually increasing since January and has actually reversed much of the
decline that we saw in the second half of 2015. In terms of the market-based measures of
inflation compensation, I continue to think it’s mostly about term premium and the relative
liquidity characteristics of nominal versus inflation-protected Treasury securities, so I don’t
really take much signal from that.
July 26–27, 2016
156 of 283
What does this all mean for monetary policy? Well, I think it argues for a cautious
approach at this meeting, and although I can support another increase or two in the federal funds
rate this year, I also can imagine that economic growth might be sufficiently soft and the outlook
could be sufficiently uncertain that it would make sense to hold off for a while longer. So while
the economy is growing at only about a 2 percent annual rate, what that means is, we’re using up
the excess slack in the U.S. labor market only very slowly. I think this can be seen, for example,
in the trajectory of the unemployment rate this year, which has essentially been sideways. With
inflation below rather than above our target and monetary policy not far from a neutral setting, I
don’t really see the need to rush. I think this is also reinforced by what I see as asymmetric risk
of raising interest rates too early versus too late. If the economy turns out to be stronger than
expected, necessitating a tighter monetary policy, I don’t think it will be that difficult to catch up,
but if the economy turns out to be weaker than expected, our toolkit just isn’t as robust.
Moreover, the fact that that asymmetry is widely known means that economic weakness could
have a more negative effect on household and business confidence than usual, potentially
reinforcing the downward pressure on economic activity.
Now, tomorrow—I’m going to foreshadow this—we are going to be essentially debating
how much of a forward lean to put into the statement language about September. That’s really
what tomorrow’s about, or what Thomas is going to get into in a few minutes. I’m going to be
arguing for only a very slight lean, which I think is embodied in the alternative B language, for
two reasons. First, we said our monetary policy decisions are data dependent. I think if we
strongly foreshadow that we’re going to move in September, it contradicts that. There’s just too
much time, too much data, and too much uncertainty about where we’ll be in September.
Second, I think we are losing credibility by foreshadowing future tightening moves and then not
July 26–27, 2016
157 of 283
following through on them. I don’t think the mistake here is that we haven’t followed through. I
think there have been good reasons for it. I think, instead, the error has been that we’ve
foreshadowed prematurely before we knew we were actually going to move. If it turns out that
we want to move in September, there’s plenty of time between now and then to alter monetary
policy expectations. What I don’t want to do is alter those expectations prematurely before I or
we have a firm grasp on whether we actually want to move in September. Thank you, Madam
Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you, and thanks to everybody for an interesting discussion of
the outlook and the risks associated with it. I’d just like to add a couple of brief comments of my
own.
As many of you have already noted, we were confronted with two key uncertainties at the
June meeting: first, the outcome of the Brexit vote and its global consequences and, second, the
implications of the remarkably weak May labor market report. In the case of Brexit, I admit that
I really didn’t expect the “leave” side to prevail, but I was even more surprised by how quickly
financial markets recovered from the initial shock. As a result, it now seems likely that the
decision to exit will have only a minor effect on the U.S. economy in the near term. That said,
the Brexit decision has highlighted and perhaps exacerbated the vulnerability of European banks.
The longer-run political and economic consequences of the vote, as many of you have noted,
remain murky for both the United Kingdom and Europe, and those may well pose problems for
us down the road.
The recent news on the labor front has been even more reassuring. At the time of our
June meeting, one couldn’t rule out the possibility that the May report signaled the start of a
pronounced slowdown in the labor market. Since then, however, we’ve learned that payroll
July 26–27, 2016
158 of 283
gains rebounded sharply in June to 287,000. In addition, labor force participation rose;
involuntary part-time employment more than reversed its May spike; and the broader
U-6 measure of labor utilization continued to decline. On balance, these and other indicators
confirm that labor market conditions remain healthy and that slack has continued to diminish.
Moreover, I anticipate that labor utilization is likely to tighten somewhat further in coming
months, as overall economic activity appears to be expanding at a moderate pace, with solid
growth in consumer outlays compensating for softness in most other categories of spending.
These developments might seem to suggest that economic conditions, despite some
bumps along the way, have ended up about as we anticipated back in late May, when I and
several of you said that another increase in the federal funds rate would likely be appropriate in
coming months if the labor market continued to improve. But I don’t think that’s quite right.
Back in May, the latest three months of labor market data showed average payroll gains of
200,000 per month, which implied that employment was continuing to expand at a fairly rapid
clip that would likely lead to appreciably tighter labor market conditions later in the year.
However, average payroll gains on a three-month basis are now running at less than 150,000 per
month, a more subdued, albeit still respectable, pace.
Other indicators also support the view that the pace of labor market improvement, while
still proceeding, has slowed somewhat in recent quarters. The unemployment rate is essentially
unchanged since last fall, as is the share of workers involuntarily working part time. Initial
claims and layoffs have flattened out this year, as have hires and quits in the JOLTS data
Finally, business and household surveys of expected labor market conditions either show no
improvement or have softened in recent months. This slowing is not especially worrisome, as it
may simply reflect the lackluster GDP growth seen around the turn of the year. If so, then
July 26–27, 2016
159 of 283
average payroll gains may move back up fairly soon in response to the pickup in economic
growth that we’ve seen recently and the further strengthening that the staff projects. Under those
conditions, increasing the federal funds rate in coming months would likely be appropriate to
keep resource utilization from tightening too quickly. After all, employment growth, as many of
you have noted, eventually has to slow by enough to bring it in line with its sustainable longerrun trend.
But the modest cooling of the labor market that we’ve seen recently could instead turn
out to be persistent, perhaps because trend productivity growth has picked up some after several
years of exceptional weakness. And, of course, the pace of employment gains could slow
further. If so, the case for raising the federal funds rate in the near term strikes me as less
compelling. For example, suppose that, absent another rate hike, payrolls continue to expand at
an average pace of 150,000 per month and the participation rate remains flat. Then, by the end
of the year, the unemployment rate will likely edge down to only 4.8 percent. Such an outcome
would hardly indicate that monetary policy had fallen “behind the curve” as long as inflation is
still running well below 2 percent, as the staff projects. In contrast, average payroll gains of
200,000 per month over the second half of this year, especially if accompanied by falling labor
force participation, would put the unemployment rate on a much steeper downward trajectory,
thus necessitating a policy response.
In contrast to the labor market situation, the outlook for inflation seems to have changed
very little since the spring, with the price data coming in about as expected in recent months.
Importantly, the downward pressure from past dollar appreciation on the rate of change of import
prices has largely dissipated since the turn of the year, thereby adding a couple of tenths to PCE
inflation. In addition, the disinflationary effects of past declines in oil prices have decreased
July 26–27, 2016
160 of 283
substantially, although they’re unlikely to disappear completely until early 2017. Accordingly, it
still looks like headline and core inflation will remain close to 1 percent and 1½ percent,
respectively, on a 12-month basis through the end of the year. Thereafter, I continue to expect
that inflation will move gradually back to 2 percent in the context of a moderately tight labor
market.
In anticipation of tomorrow morning’s policy round, what does all of this imply for our
decision at this meeting? Once again, I think it’s appropriate for us to take a wait-and-see
approach with regard to adjusting the funds rate. In view of the erratic swings in the recent labor
market indicators, I believe that we should collect more data in order to get a better sense of the
underlying momentum in the labor market. If the next couple of labor market reports show
reasonably strong average payroll gains and the overall outlook remains favorable, then raising
the target range would likely be appropriate. But if the evidence suggests that the labor market
really has cooled, then I would be inclined to wait, particularly if the price data continue to come
in as expected.
Let me stop there. We have dinner tonight, and it’s still early relative to that, so I think
we’ve got time for Thomas to give us his monetary policy briefing.
MR. LAUBACH. 6 Thank you, Madam Chair. I’ll be referring to the handout
labeled “Material for the Briefing on Monetary Policy Alternatives.” As noted in
your earlier briefings, U.S. financial conditions appear to have become, on balance,
more accommodative during the intermeeting period.
The top-left panel summarizes two mechanisms that could explain some of the
recent movement in asset prices. The first works through market participants’
expectations for U.S. monetary policy—that is, the easing in U.S. financial conditions
since the June meeting could reflect market participants’ expectations of a more
accommodative path of U.S. monetary policy than previously thought. In the wake of
the Brexit vote, greater U.S. monetary policy accommodation would provide a more
6
The materials used by Mr. Laubach are appended to this transcript (appendix 6).
July 26–27, 2016
161 of 283
substantial cushion against downside risks coming from abroad and, as a result, boost
asset prices in the United States.
The second mechanism focuses on the prospect of greater-than-previouslyanticipated monetary policy accommodation abroad. That additional accommodation
may have had an effect on U.S. financial markets that went well beyond that
associated with exchange rates. For instance, global investors may have responded to
lower yields in Europe by rebalancing their portfolios toward equities and other
higher-yielding assets, including dollar-denominated assets.
Of course, the two mechanisms highlighted here are not mutually exclusive.
Indeed, both may have contributed to the easing of U.S. financial conditions since the
June meeting. Nonetheless, their relative importance may matter a great deal for your
assessment of the appropriate stance of U.S. monetary policy and, therefore, for your
deliberations on the policy statement.
For instance, to the extent that changes in asset prices since the June meeting
primarily reflect expectations of greater monetary policy accommodation in the
United States than previously anticipated—the first mechanism—financial conditions
could be especially sensitive to your communications. That is, the improvement
could prove quite ephemeral if your words or actions were to go significantly counter
to market expectations, leading asset prices to make an abrupt U-turn. Accordingly,
you might be reluctant to adopt either the first version of paragraph 3 in
alternative C—which would greatly surprise the market by announcing an increase in
the target range for the federal funds rate—or the second version of that paragraph—
which states that the Committee “sees the case for an increase in the federal funds
rate as having strengthened since its June meeting.” Instead, you might decide to
maintain a wait-and-see approach that likely would leave market expectations for the
policy rate path little changed, as in alternative B, or even adopt the language in
alternative A, which notes that “the Committee sees the risks to the U.S. economic
outlook as tilted somewhat to the downside.”
Turning to the second possible mechanism, the intermeeting changes in asset
prices may primarily reflect portfolio rebalancing and search-for-yield behavior on
the part of global investors. If so, we may now be importing monetary
accommodation. For instance, expectations of a longer period of ultralow interest
rates and additional QE in Europe post-Brexit may have kept sovereign yields and
term premiums low and boosted the prices of stocks and corporate bonds not just in
Europe, but also elsewhere, including in the United States. As a result, movements in
U.S. asset prices since the June meeting may well reflect an easing of financial
conditions that is not directly associated with anticipated changes in U.S. monetary
policy. Again, this raises the question of how the Committee might want to respond.
At this juncture, the staff and most outside forecasters do not appear to anticipate
that the change in U.S. financial conditions to date has been sufficient to significantly
alter the outlook for domestic economic activity and inflation. Indeed, the Committee
might see the easing in financial conditions as a welcome development that—together
July 26–27, 2016
162 of 283
with the employment report for June—increased its confidence that the economy is
likely to remain on track with the Committee’s modal outlook. Accordingly, the
Committee might choose to indicate, as in alternative B, that “near-term risks to the
economic outlook have diminished” but leave its policy message otherwise
unchanged. In contrast, if the Committee viewed the recent easing in financial
conditions as adding more stimulus than warranted by the current state of the U.S.
economy, the Committee might decide to offset that additional stimulus by adopting
or signaling a less accommodative stance of monetary policy, as in alternative C.
What does the incoming information since the June meeting tell us about the
relative importance of the two mechanisms discussed thus far? The evidence pointing
to changes in U.S. monetary policy expectations as the primary mechanism
underlying the recent easing of U.S. financial conditions is not all that compelling.
Although respondents to the latest Desk surveys generally have marked down their
funds rate expectations for longer projection horizons—a revision that may well have
been influenced by the results of the June SEP—the expected federal funds rate path
implied by overnight index swap quotes—the solid lines in the upper-right panel—is
virtually unchanged, on net, since the June FOMC meeting. Similarly, the two-year
Treasury yield (not shown), which tends to be very sensitive to market views on the
funds rate outlook, is little changed. And, as shown in the middle-left panel, quotes
from federal funds futures options imply that the probability distribution is now more
concentrated around “one or none” for the rest of the year, but its center has shifted
only slightly to the left.
The remaining charts in my handout summarize information that you may find
useful in assessing the relative importance of the second mechanism, the notion that
portfolio rebalancing and “reach-for-yield” behavior on the part of global investors
may underlie the recent easing of domestic financial conditions The chart in the
lower-left panel shows that downward moves in longer-dated Treasury yields in the
roughly two-week period that followed the Brexit vote were largely concentrated at
the beginning of the London and Tokyo trading sessions. This pattern would seem to
suggest that global investors indeed may have been engaging in efforts to rebalance
their portfolios toward longer-term U.S. Treasury securities and possibly toward other
dollar-denominated assets such as corporate bonds.
Consistent with this view of the relative importance of global factors in explaining
recent changes in U.S. Treasury yields, the middle-right panel shows the ratio of two
measures of volatility in the Treasury securities market: volatility of the 10-year
Treasury yield during the overnight trading session—which is dominated by trading
in Tokyo and London—and volatility during the New York City daytime trading
session (which is 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. local time). It is quite evident that, relative to
the daytime session, Treasury market volatility in the overnight session has risen
appreciably post-Brexit.
Lastly, as Lorie discussed in her briefing and as shown in the bottom-right panel,
respondents to the latest Open Market Desk survey have overwhelmingly pointed to
July 26–27, 2016
163 of 283
spillovers from low or declining yields abroad as a main factor explaining the recent
decline in the five-year, five-year-forward nominal Treasury yield.
Thus far, I have focused on the potential implications of recent financial
developments for your deliberations on the draft statements included in your handout.
More broadly, the draft statements differ importantly in their assessments of other
information received over the intermeeting period. Specifically, alternative B would
acknowledge the strong June labor market report and the further increase in labor
utilization while leaving the Committee’s modal outlook essentially unchanged.
Compared with the June statement, the key innovation in alternative B is the
assessment that near-term risks to the outlook have diminished.
Alternative C offers a more sanguine view of inflation developments than
alternative B and notes that the Committee now “sees the near-term risks to the U.S.
economic outlook as nearly balanced.” In contrast, alternative A projects greater
pessimism regarding the inflation outlook. It would state that the risks to the U.S.
economic outlook are “tilted somewhat to the downside” and would signal that a
near-term increase in the target range for the federal funds rate is unlikely. Thank
you, Madam Chair. This concludes my prepared remarks.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Are there questions for Thomas?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Yes, I have a question for Thomas.
CHAIR YELLEN. Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Couldn’t you interpret the ratio of overnight to tradinghour volatility differently as just an indication of where the information arises in the world that
affects people’s outlook of global economic growth and the market for U.S. Treasury securities?
For example, couldn’t you get this spike because the Brexit moves occurred over there?
Normally, the volatility is below 1 because most of the news relevant to Treasury securities
happens here in U.S. time. So it might not be anything having to do with global portfolio
rebalancing. It might just be due to where the distribution of the important news falls. If our
news is boring and their news is really interesting, then I would expect that the volatility during
overnight sessions would go up relative to the volatility in U.S. sessions.
July 26–27, 2016
164 of 283
MR. LAUBACH. That’s right. One concern here could well be that because the big
event was Brexit and it clearly showed up during overnight hours, that’s what’s driving the
result.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Yes, because it is a one-month rolling volatility, the
Brexit event is a tremendous pull.
MR. LAUBACH. Yes, that’s right. Now, that said, the lower-left panel actually
excludes the Brexit date itself. Those data start only on June 26, so you do see that even after the
Brexit event had passed you still have this development.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. I find the lower-left one more compelling. So I guess
we agree. [Laughter]
CHAIR YELLEN. Are there other questions for Thomas? [No response] Okay. Seeing
none, why don’t we adjourn for now? We have a reception and dinner, as usual, across the
street, and we will reconvene at 9:00 a.m. tomorrow.
[Meeting recessed]
July 26–27, 2016
165 of 283
July 27 Session
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay. Good morning, everybody. Let’s get started. We have a data
release this morning. Let me ask David Wilcox if he’d like to comment on that.
MR. WILCOX. I don’t have a detailed readout. I did just speak with our sector
specialists, and they’re still processing the data. It’s clear that the release is weaker than we had
anticipated. This is the advance report on orders and shipments of durable goods, which feeds
into the BEA’s estimate of equipment and intangibles investment. This release, probably more
than any other, is very opaque to read. Translating the orders and shipments data into estimates
of equipment investment is not straightforward. It’s clear, though, that this will take our estimate
down into negative territory. We’d had real equipment and intangible investment about flat in
the second quarter. This will take it down by about 1 percentage point. That’s probably worth
about one-tenth on the growth of GDP in the second quarter—we were at 1.8 in the Tealbook,
and we’re probably down at about 1.7 now—and another one-tenth out of the third quarter, give
or take. So that would put us at about 1.8 in the third quarter.
CHAIR YELLEN. Are there any questions for David? [No response] Okay. I guess
we’re ready to begin our policy round. We already do have one suggestion on the table for an
edit to the statement pertaining to residential investment. So let me tee that up, and I will ask
you as we go around if you would like to comment on your views about this change. President
Williams—and I did hear some support from others—suggests that in alternative B, we simply
delete any reference to residential investment rather than saying that it, along with business fixed
investment, has been soft. So the sentence would read “Household spending has been growing
strongly but business fixed investment has been soft,” and that would be an alternative to the
wording that’s currently in alternative B. As we go around, I would appreciate it if you would
July 26–27, 2016
166 of 283
comment briefly on that change. Okay. We’re going to begin our go-round with Governor
Tarullo.
MR. TARULLO. Thank you, Madam Chair. I support alternative B, even though I find
some of the language of alternative A to be more compatible with my views.
The additional sentence in paragraph 2 of alternative B on the diminution of near-term
risks is in itself correct, though by not mentioning the admittedly hard-to-quantify medium-term
risks to the global economy associated with the Brexit vote result and its aftermath, the sentence
perhaps leaves a marginally more upbeat message than might be strictly accurate, at least with
respect to international risks. But I’m willing to accept the sentence as it is.
The inclusion of this sentence obviously reflects at least some shift in the Committee’s
risk assessment and thus some reorientation of its monetary policy stance, but the statement
wisely omits any language suggesting some lean of the Committee toward raising rates at an
upcoming meeting. Of course, conditional on my current assessment of economic conditions, I
would oppose any such language on substantive grounds, but I think that, no matter what one’s
policy view, institutional considerations—namely, the Committee’s credibility—argue against
inclusion of any such language. We don’t want another instance in which language that raises
the prospect of a rate increase in an upcoming meeting is interpreted by markets as perhaps less
conditional than it was actually intended by the Committee or its participants.
Market expectations of the path of the federal funds rate and of the likelihood of an
increase at specific upcoming meetings have indeed adjusted in response to the ups and downs of
recent economic data and developments. Because a good bit can happen between now and the
remainder of this year’s meetings, and on account of the propensity of markets to overread any
suggestion by the Committee of an increase at a particular meeting or in a particular time frame,
July 26–27, 2016
167 of 283
we should let the economic data do more of the talking for us. Should market expectations vary
too substantially in either direction, the Chair, at her discretion and depending on her assessment
of where the Committee stands, could use her public speaking opportunities, including but not
limited to her Jackson Hole speech, to affect these expectations. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Williams.
MR. WILLIAMS. Thank you, Madam Chair. I support alternative C. The uncertainties
that argued for a delay at our June meeting have largely been resolved, with a favorable baseline
economic outlook intact. A broad range of labor market indicators continue to point to
conditions consistent with full employment, while inflation remains on a gradual upward trend
toward 2 percent. Continued delay in raising the funds rate risks putting us “behind the curve”
and creates the risk of greater fallout if we have to hike rates quickly to get back on track. Now,
I know it’s popular to describe the glacial pace of policy adjustment as cautious, but, to my eye,
this approach is becoming increasingly risky in terms of raising future potential risks to financial
stability and the economy. This echoes remarks that Presidents Rosengren and Mester made
yesterday.
In principle, I would support a rate increase today, but that would be highly confusing
and disruptive against the background of our prior communications. So I strongly prefer
alternative C with paragraph 3′, which indicates that the case for an increase in the funds rate has
strengthened over the intermeeting period. Short of alternative C, we should at least explicitly
acknowledge in alternative B that the case for raising rates has increased and certainly hasn’t
diminished. This optionality allows for data-dependent adjustments as we go forward, but with
the modal federal funds rate path of the June SEP still on the table.
July 26–27, 2016
168 of 283
In contrast, alternative B as written will likely be understood as indicating that a
September increase is unlikely, thus precluding the possibility of two rate hikes this year. This
would be viewed as a downward revision to the near-term funds rate path relative to our median
and modal June SEP numbers. As conditions since June have stayed on track or even improved
relative to expectations in some respects, such a shift to lower rates and greater monetary
accommodation seems out of tune with our strategy and with our communications up to this
point.
I have a couple of comments on the statement language, which I found problematic in a
number of respects. First, in all three alternatives, paragraph 1 refers to the swing in job gains in
May and June. This specificity about the monthly data releases may strengthen market
perceptions that our actions are—in the apt phrasing of Governor Brainard—data point
dependent. Our communications should not foster a fixation on the monthly ups and downs of
the data. So I would simply delete the sentence in alternatives B and C that says “job gains were
strong in June following weak growth in May.” Second, as I’ve already talked about and as the
Chair mentioned, I would strike the phrase “and residential investment” in paragraph 1. I just
want to remind us that real residential investment jumped at an annual pace of 15 percent in the
first quarter. Although recent indicators suggest some slowing of residential investment, this is
only a partial payback for the torrid pace of growth early in the year. And I think it would
misrepresent the situation to characterize homebuilding as soft and would be especially
misleading to lump residential investment together with business investment, as the latter has
been on a notable downtrend for quite some time. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Evans.
July 26–27, 2016
169 of 283
MR. EVANS. I’d just ask a question—perhaps of Thomas—because we hadn’t had any
discussion about omitting the phrase about residential investment. Last time, it was referred to.
If you take it out, is there any mention of residential investment? How do market watchers
generally respond to some complete omission? Is it going to get more prominence or less
prominence?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. You’re also taking out the reference to trade.
CHAIR YELLEN. Yes, the reference to net exports is going, too.
MR. EVANS. Okay. Could I just ask the staff their opinion on this?
MR. LAUBACH. Yes. To be upfront, I have a very hard time making good guesses
about how market watchers might respond to changes.
MR. EVANS. I understand that. That’s okay.
MR. LAUBACH. But, that said, one interpretation is that there’s no news. That is
certainly what we intended with the striking of the reference to net exports, because there was
really nothing new to report.
Now, I have to confess that I don’t know exactly when the reference to residential
investment was added to the statement. I would have to look that up. It’s certainly been in there
for a number of rounds, but it hasn’t always been there. I would think that it will be noticed as a
downgrade, because if you no longer say that it’s improving, it seems to imply it’s doing less,
and that would be consistent with the recent data flow. So my guess would be that it would be
interpreted as a soft downgrading.
MR. EVANS. Okay. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Lacker.
July 26–27, 2016
170 of 283
MR. LACKER. Thank you, Madam Chair. In my mind, the most useful benchmarks for
evaluating the stance of monetary policy are the policy rules that seem to capture the way we’ve
behaved in past periods during which we were relatively successful. One can argue about the
details of particular rules, but just about every one that makes it to our desk has the policy rate
deviating from normal in response to an inflation gap and some measure of a real-activity gap.
Because these gaps are small now, we should be returning our policy rate to more normal
settings, with an adjustment for the possibility, of course, of a lower natural real rate.
Tealbook B puts the prescribed policy rate for either Taylor rule at about 2.4 percent, and
that’s 200 basis points away from our current policy setting. A departure from our benchmark of
that magnitude is fairly large. One might argue that the natural real rate is lower than the
1 percent value assumed by the Tealbook staff. For example, the current estimate using the
Laubach-Williams procedure is around zero, and the Lubik-Matthes estimates are very similar.
Even in this case, though, the prescribed policy rate would be 1½ percent, more than 100 basis
points higher than the current rate, and I think that’s still a large gap by historical standards.
We’ve occasionally been 100 basis points away from the Taylor rule in the past, but never for a
sustained stretch. On top of that, it’s worth pointing out something about the Laubach-Williams
procedure. Their procedure produces a joint estimate of the natural real rate and the output gap,
the two latent variables in their set-up. Their current estimate of the output gap is large and
positive, about 140 basis points. The natural, internally consistent way is to apply both their
natural real rate and their output gap estimates at the same time, and the net effect of doing that
results in a Taylor rule policy prescription of 2¼ or 3 percent, depending on whether you use
Taylor (1993) or Taylor (1999). This again implies that the funds rate is now very far below
where it should be by those prescriptions.
July 26–27, 2016
171 of 283
Some would say that the real-activity gap might still be negative, as opposed to the staff’s
calculation of an essentially zero output gap. This would imply a lower Taylor rule prescription.
For example, a natural unemployment rate of 4 percent or lower would justify the current policy
rate. Now, 4 percent is well below all of our estimates of the natural rate, but those estimates, of
course, are notoriously imprecise. So I can understand the motivation for delaying an increase in
rates. We’d all like to see more employment opportunities for as many Americans as possible.
But theory and experience tell us that there are risks on both sides. Waiting too long to raise
rates can leave us with a higher unemployment rate later on as we fight against an increase in
inflation.
There’s an argument that we’re perfectly capable of responding effectively if inflation
should surge, but our ability to do so depends on inflation expectations remaining anchored or, if
they start to drift, on our ability to manage and contain them. At present, our understanding of
the formation and evolution of expectations is fairly limited. They may seem anchored now, but
they’ve been quite variable at times in the past, and I don’t think we have much of an analytical
basis for predicting how or when they might become unanchored. But I think we do know that
unstable expectations in the past have been associated with departures from good benchmark
policy rules. If expectations become unanchored, then it would surely reflect beliefs that we are
departing from those past patterns of behavior. And, surely, if expectations are anchored, it
reflects a sense that we’re going to continue in a way that’s relatively consistent with those past
patterns of behavior. I think it should be evident that the further we deviate from those
benchmarks, the greater the risk that inflation and inflation expectations break away. So I think
that there are serious risks associated with probing, as the phrase is, to see if the natural rate of
unemployment might be below where we are right now.
July 26–27, 2016
172 of 283
We’ve delayed raising rates this year in part because of events that have caused
uncertainty arise. When uncertainty subsides, as it clearly has now, we should seize the moment
and get on with it rather than continue to fall further behind our benchmarks. I think now is one
of those times, a time for opportunistic normalization. So I support alternative C and
paragraph 3.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Rosengren.
MR. ROSENGREN. Thank you, Madam Chair. I support alternative B for this meeting,
although I could have also been supportive of some of the stronger language in alternative C.
My preference for this meeting is for a statement tilting more strongly toward indicating an
increase in the federal funds rate at the next meeting. I view the statement as leaving open the
possibility of an increase in September, but I think it is unlikely to raise the market probability of
a September increase as much as I view is warranted. I am not arguing for calendar-dependent
promises in the statement. The volatility in payroll employment over the past two months, as
well as the surprise Brexit vote, highlights risks in such a strategy. But the relatively modest
changes in the statement outside of the first paragraph are likely to leave many outside of this
room expecting no change in September. If incoming data are consistent with my forecast,
which I see as requiring a rate increase in September, we may need to use speeches and other
opportunities to communicate to the public the increased probability of a September move.
Stepping aside from the near-term tactical decisions, I think it’s important to reframe how
we have been thinking about policy normalization. Because we have been extremely and
justifiably patient to date in ensuring the economy gets very near our dual-mandate goals before
raising the funds rate, we should not view our decisions as balancing on a knife’s edge between
action and inaction. At this point, I believe that we should change from a default of no action
July 26–27, 2016
173 of 283
unless everything is perfect in the next six-week period to a default of a plan to take action unless
circumstances significantly alter our outlook. That is, my preference would be that unless
incoming data and events suggest a material change to the forecast, we should tighten in
September.
My estimate of the natural rate is 4.7 percent. As a result, I believe that a baseline
forecast that results in a 4.3 percent unemployment rate implies that we will need to tighten more
rapidly. If we receive evidence that suggests that the natural rate is in the low 4s, we can slow
down the rate of increase in the funds rate increase later on in the normalization process.
Further, there remain some upside risks relative to our baseline outlook, and were those risks to
materialize, we would, of course, need to tighten even more quickly. But such rapid rate
adjustments run an even greater risk of jeopardizing the attainment of full employment. Finally,
uncertainty regarding the estimate of the equilibrium interest rate further bolsters the argument
for gradual tightening, as a gradual increase affords us the time to gauge whether we have gone
too far or not far enough. For all of these reasons, I am concerned that we may be waiting too
long to remove accommodation, with a consequence of having to raise rates more rapidly later in
the normalization process, placing the attainment of full employment and price stability at
greater risk than is warranted.
And I would remove the reference to residential investment.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Fischer.
MR. FISCHER. Thank you, Madam Chair. In making my decision as to which of the
three alternatives to support, I found the material on pages 30 to 35 of Tealbook B very useful.
That’s the material that makes the case for supporting each of the potential decisions. On the
basis of the arguments set out in those pages and other evidence and considerations—including
July 26–27, 2016
174 of 283
the comments I made at our previous meeting, which was only six weeks ago—I support
alternative B. Alternative B makes a case for leaving the federal funds rate unchanged at this
meeting and avoiding “signaling the timing of the next policy move.” I would, nonetheless, like
to comment on some of the statements made in “The Case for Alternative B” on pages 30 and 31
of Tealbook B and to say that there’s a difference between signaling the precise timing and
signaling an approximate timing or signaling that the next policy move has come closer.
All right. Here are my comments on the arguments in Tealbook B. There are two
statements in the Economic Outlook section on page 30 of Tealbook B. One says “Policymakers
may view the information they have received about the labor market and real activity as
consistent, on balance, with their modal forecasts at the time of the June FOMC meeting.” And
the second says “Policymakers may judge that near-term risks to the economic outlook have
diminished.” I disagree with the first statement. I believe the data we received on June payrolls
and the effects of Brexit are better than my forecasts in June would have been had I made one. I
do believe that near-term risks to the economic outlook have diminished. With regard to longerterm risks, I believe that the Brexit decision will result in more uncertainty about political and
economic developments in the United Kingdom—or at least in what is now the United
Kingdom—and the European Union, but that this will have relatively little effect on the United
States unless it leads to major changes in the structure of the EU.
The analysis of the labor market in this section of Tealbook B says that “a range of labor
market indicators points to increasing utilization; however, the unemployment rate, at 4.9 percent
in June, is unchanged, on net, since the beginning of the year.” When the unemployment rate
was well above 5 percent, we began to say that to raise the interest rate, we’d need to see
continuing improvements in the labor market and an increase in inflation. I believe we’ve seen
July 26–27, 2016
175 of 283
improvements in the labor market in recent months, particularly including in increases in the
participation rate. But, at some point, we’ll have to say that maintenance of strong conditions in
the labor market is the situation we want to sustain. And I believe that an unemployment rate of
4.9 percent is near enough to most people’s measure of full employment to say that we’re close
to having a strong conditions in the labor market, although no doubt we would all be happy to
discover that a lower unemployment rate, somewhere around 4.5 percent, is consistent with
maximum employment, stable prices, and the maintenance of strong conditions in the labor
market.
My next comment is that we need at some point to take a closer look at what behavior we
demand of the inflation rate. Over the past year, we have allowed ourselves to imply that
inflation is too low if it is less than 2 percent, without recognizing that there’s a difference
between an inflation rate of 1.6 percent and one of 1.2 percent. We have accepted that we’ll treat
divergences from the inflation target symmetrically. Is there anyone here who will fight to
reduce the inflation rate from 2.2 percent to 2 percent when we reach 2.2 percent?
Next, the Policy Strategy section states that “the rebound in job gains represents only one
month of data. By the time of the September FOMC meeting, policymakers will have seen two
more employment reports and may have a better sense of the underlying trend in employment
growth.” I agree with that. But I believe that September should not be ruled out as being too
soon to raise the rate if the incoming data are very positive, and I do not think we’re far from
making such a decision.
The final argument in “The Case for Alternative B” in Tealbook B is that “a decision to
maintain the current target range for the federal funds rate would be in line with the expectations
of financial market participants.” In our discussions, we should recognize that what financial
July 26–27, 2016
176 of 283
market participants believe is heavily influenced by what we say, and that nothing we have said
of late would cause them to think that the decision will be anything other than to keep the interest
rate unchanged. And we know that if we were to send a different signal about future interest
rates than that implied by alternative B, financial market participants would have different
expectations. So I find some conflict, to some extent, between what is said at the beginning in
this discussion about how we think that the data we’ve received is better and the fact that we take
comfort that the markets agree with us. The markets should have raised their expectations a little
bit, and they haven’t because we’re sending a very clear message, one that I think is too strong.
Let me conclude. We’re close to our full employment objective. The underlying pace of
inflation is not far from 2 percent, and our best guess at the value of the equilibrium real federal
funds rate is near but above zero, and we’re below it. Now, depending on the data, it could be
appropriate to take another cautious policy step in September. Aside from the last word of the
statement, which in June was “July” and has now become “September,” this is what I said and
believed six weeks ago. And I hope that one of these months, one of these six-week periods,
what I hope and believe will happen in the next meeting will happen. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Madam Chair. I do not think the normalization process is
going well. We ended QE in the fall of 2014. We said we would begin normalizing rates in
2015. We made only one move that year, at the last meeting of the year. We have made no
further moves during 2016. This is against a backdrop of an economy that has not behaved very
differently from forecasts of a few years ago, especially on inflation and unemployment.
Unemployment has tended to surprise to the downside for us, and inflation has actually been
very consistent with the forecast that it would remain below 2 percent.
July 26–27, 2016
177 of 283
This is in contrast to our narrative for normalization embodied in the Tealbook and in the
Summary of Economic Projections. As I discussed yesterday, the Tealbook narrative suggests
that we are on the precipice of a 200-plus basis point increase in the policy rate over the forecast
horizon. This is a little less than once per quarter. This comes from using the updated
Taylor (1999) rule, which also informs many others and has historically informed many
judgments among the Committee about the pace of rate increases. According to the Tealbook,
these increases are going to take place against a backdrop of relatively weak economic growth in
the near term, an unemployment rate that is just three-tenths lower at the end of 2017 than it is
today, and an inflation rate that remains below target. I do not think that this is a realistic
narrative. I think it forces us to draw on increasingly tenuous excuses as to why we are not
following through on our announced plans. This is hurting our credibility. Markets discounted
this narrative long ago, and our actions this year are ratifying their expectations.
The St. Louis Fed’s new narrative improves on this situation. It suggests a relatively flat
policy rate path with some upside risk, depending on how the data evolve. It does not leave a
200-plus basis point policy move lingering over the market. It suggests that r† is minus
140 basis points, which is the ex post real return on one-year Treasury securities over the past
three years. Real returns on short-term government debt are unlikely to switch to higher values
any time soon, nor is mean reversion a good prediction. The best guess is that this situation will
simply persist, at least over a period of two to two-and-a-half years. The St. Louis Federal
Reserve narrative realistically suggests that the current slow-growth environment is likely to
continue. It suggests that the labor market is essentially at full employment and perhaps will not
improve further, in a situation of relatively slow growth. It also suggests that inflation does not
look set to increase very far above our 2 percent target.
July 26–27, 2016
178 of 283
The conclusion is that a relatively low policy rate is consistent with achieving our
inflation target and full employment over the next two and a half years. Adoption of the
St. Louis approach would, in my view, improve the alignment of market expectations with the
likely future path of policy. For today, I support alternative B. The Federal Reserve Bank of St.
Louis approach does call for one more rate increase, and I would be happy to make this move at
the September meeting, provided the data cooperate. I do prefer to move on good news about
the economy. I would also support President Williams’s suggestion on residential investment.
Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Harker.
MR. HARKER. Thank you, Madam Chair. in light of my fairly upbeat outlook for the
economy and the slow but persistent march of inflation to target, the language in alternative B
seems a bit too equivocal even after the most recent changes.
The two matters we talked about yesterday, the two most pressing concerns at our June
meeting, have dissolved. In June, 287,000 net new jobs were added, and financial markets were
generally unfazed by the Brexit vote after the initial shock wore off. I welcome the recent
change to paragraph 2 stating that the “near-term risks to the economic outlook have
diminished.” That said, the message in alternative B is only modestly changed from June, and I
fear that the reaction will be similar, taking the next meeting off the table. It could also very well
indicate that our policy is insufficiently sensitive to events on the upside. That insensitivity may,
in turn, serve to confuse markets on exactly what types of data will be sufficient for
normalization to proceed. If we are delaying normalization because we need much greater
evidence that inflation is indeed trending upward, then perhaps we should make that point more
explicitly. Or if uncertainty over the level of the natural real rate leads to the belief that policy is
July 26–27, 2016
179 of 283
not overly accommodative, that point should be articulated. But whatever is driving the
unresponsiveness of policy needs to be stated clearly. Communicating a very similar message
either in the statement or in public comments under what I perceive to be clearly improved
economic circumstances does not seem to represent a strategy that will allow a September rate
increase to be a realistic option.
So what can we do? While I can live with alternative B as is today, one possible
improvement is to add language, like that in alternative C, stating that the near-term risks to the
economy are nearly balanced or have become more balanced, instead of saying that they have
diminished. This more positive tone in the language would send a clearer signal that September
is a possibility without overpromising that a move would indeed occur. And on residential
investment, I also support President Williams’s view. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Kaplan.
MR. KAPLAN. Thank you, Madam Chair. I support alternative B with both proposed
amendments by President Williams. That includes the one on job gains in June versus May for
the reasons he articulated. So I support both of those edits.
I do think the case for removing some amount of accommodation has strengthened since
June. First, on the pro side, I believe we are making progress in achieving our dual-mandate
objectives. In particular, the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas trimmed mean as well as other,
similar measures of core inflation are gradually moving in a direction that suggests we will reach
our inflation target in the medium term. I think labor market slack is declining and we are
moving toward full employment, and I hope that upcoming data will give us an opportunity to
confirm this.
July 26–27, 2016
180 of 283
Second, I believe excesses are building, although not to the point at which I’m alarmed.
As has been discussed, I am concerned about commercial real estate. I’m also—I must say,
maybe colored by my background—concerned about what I see in stock market valuation. By
my measure—and I’m using a per-share number of $115— market P/E is getting close to 19
times earnings in a period when corporate earnings are actually declining. I’m concerned about
where the markets are going to go from here. My experience is, when stock market valuations
become excessive, there may be imbalances building up outside the banking system, particularly
in the nonbank financial markets, some of which we, at the Federal Reserve, are not able to see.
I’m slightly concerned about the buildup in nonbank financial debt—that is, on the corporate
side—although I think that’s still manageable. And I do worry about distortions in asset
allocation—disincentives for savers as the population ages and people tend to live off their
incomes—and I’m worried overall about a rise in risk-taking, particularly as we move from here.
In terms of the cons, I do believe the market is certainly unprepared today for us to raise
rates, as we know, and they seem to be not quite prepared for September, either. I do think the
uncertainties of Brexit as well as China—which, to me, is a significant risk—are unlikely to be
resolved any time soon. Between now and September, though, we’ll get a little bit better clarity
on the Italian bank situation, which I do think is worth watching. And, obviously, we’ll get two
additional job reports, which will help in confirming the trend on the labor markets. We’ll also
get a chance to more clearly see if the recent strength in new home sales translates into a pickup
in permits for single-family homes.
I’m also persuaded by our work and the comments made here regarding the neutral rate
that it is lower than widely recognized. I agree with President Harker that we have not clearly
communicated this. I do think that we are not as accommodative as is widely believed, and, on
July 26–27, 2016
181 of 283
the margin, that reduces the urgency for us to move or, to say it another way, allows us to be
patient.
But in light of all of this, as I said, I favor alternative B as amended, although I am
forward leaning in us gradually and patiently moving toward removal of accommodation. As we
approach our September meeting, I would hope that if incoming data warrant, FOMC
communication, potentially from the Chair at Jackson Hole or some other venues, will, as has
been suggested, begin to signal to the market that we believe removal of some accommodation is
warranted in the near future. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Evans.
MR. EVANS. Thank you, Madam Chair. I have no objection to the change in language
with regard to housing. I would think it would be better to come up with a characterization of
what it is rather than just deleting it entirely. I think what happens in this case is that people
probably think, “Oh, they mentioned housing last time. Let me go see what the latest data were.
I can’t remember.” And if they see that the data were kind of soft, they’re going to have to come
up with their own interpretation. But I don’t have any objection to omitting it.
On the basis of my outlook and my expectations for continued data confirmations, I
support alternative B as written. As I mentioned yesterday, my economic growth outlook has not
changed materially since June, though I do think the downside risks have diminished some. I’ve
also made no changes to my inflation outlook or my readings of the downside risks to it. I think
alternative B captures these sentiments for me.
Clearly, more of the focus today is on what we’re going to be doing in September and
beyond. If there were no material changes to my baseline forecast or risk assessments, then I
could see the case for a rate increase in September. It’s not my preferred course, and it would be
July 26–27, 2016
182 of 283
a close call. However, I would not support a September move if our communications led
markets to think that a second increase in December was highly likely in the absence of very
strong data. I think it’s important that we allow adequate time to assess the economic reactions
to our next policy move before taking the next step after that. Maybe conditions would improve
enough to justify another move in December, but my base case is, they will not. Either way, in
my opinion, there’s just too much uncertainty to precondition markets to expect an end-of-year
funds rate target in the range of 75 to 100 basis points.
As I mentioned last round, I continue to be attracted to the forward-guidance language in
alternative A. It says “The Committee judges that an increase in the target range will not be
warranted until the risks to the outlook are more closely balanced and inflation moves closer to
2 percent on a sustained basis.” Frankly, I would wait until core PCE is 2 percent and projected
to be at least 2 percent over the forecast horizon. This is a strong commitment to our symmetric
2 percent inflation target, one that would likely provide much needed support to private inflation
expectations. Our inflation projections would benefit more from an increase in inflation
expectations than from a lower unemployment rate. I disagree with President Lacker on this
issue, because I think the evidence favors viewing inflation expectations as moving lower than
our inflation objective and not the case that he was worried about in terms of them being
unstable on the upside.
Regarding Governor Fischer’s question as to whether Committee members would fight
inflation of 2.2 percent if it was above 2 percent, I actually have no evidence on that. After
seven years, I have no data points to answer that, because we haven’t had inflation above
2 percent. In the spirit of something a bit more like alternative A, I would feel much more
comfortable increasing rates in September if by then core inflation appeared clearly positioned to
July 26–27, 2016
183 of 283
come in higher than my 2016 forecast, which, like the Tealbook’s, is 1.6 percent. President
Williams suggested yesterday that recent core inflation has been 2 percent, and others have made
sympathetic comments about that as well. I hope that continues in the coming months and years
even if the most recent monthly averages are like that.
Finally, policy asymmetries continue to argue for our communication that a very shallow
expected path for normalization is appropriate, as our SEP submissions display. We’re still only
a modest negative shock away from returning to the effective lower bound, while, on the other
side, if an inflation shock occurs, the inflation process is inertial enough that we most likely can
avoid any meaningful overshooting of 2 percent with modest increases in rates and the low r* we
expect into the indefinite future, at least according to the most recent Laubach-Williams update
that I saw. Also, as I discussed yesterday following the QS report, I see the apparent changes in
long-duration investor attitudes as diminishing potential financial instability concerns that might
be associated with a modestly steeper tightening than our recent SEP displays. If real-money
investors have come to believe that low equilibrium interest rates are a fixture of this economy,
then we face a lower chance of experiencing a taper tantrum–like fillip in financial conditions if
we have to pull policy normalization forward in time.
In sum, I remain on the fence about a move in September, but whatever we do then, I
think we should continue to communicate our basic policy strategy for slow, gradual rate
increases dependent on the Committee’s confidence in achieving its dual-mandate goals in as
timely a fashion as possible. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Kashkari.
MR. KASHKARI. Thank you, Madam Chair. As a Committee, we continue to debate
whether we are approaching a point when further rate increases are appropriate. Because we
July 26–27, 2016
184 of 283
can’t perfectly foresee the future path of the economy, as many others have said, I’m in favor of
taking a risk-management approach and avoiding policy choices that could lead to especially
poor outcomes. In my view, the costs associated with a monetary policy stance that, after the
fact, turns out to be too tight are likely much larger than the costs of a stance that, after the fact,
turns out to have been too loose. Many others have made these comments as well.
Regarding the alternatives presented, I support alternative B, but I don’t have a strong
view on President Williams’s changes. I’m okay with those changes either way, but I personally
am not in favor of the language that was added to paragraph 2. I understand the distinction
between near-term risks and medium-term risks, but I think it’s a little bit too subtle. It isn’t
clear to me that the risks to the economic outlook have diminished. And, maybe more important,
I don’t think the phrase is actually necessary to preserving optionality for September. I think the
statement as written preserves that optionality. We always say that every meeting is a live
meeting. So why do we therefore have to signal that we really mean the next meeting is “live,”
if we always say that every meeting is a “live” meeting?
In filling out the June SEP, I indicated one increase in the federal funds rate for 2016
because I expected that, and I hope now that tightening labor markets will continue to push
inflation toward our 2 percent target. I haven’t seen the evidence of that yet. I know that in
recent months, there’s been a little bit of an uptick, but on a year-over-year basis, there’s not any
real evidence of it. So, for me, I need to see real evidence that we’re moving toward 2 percent
before I can support a rate increase. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Lockhart.
MR. LOCKHART. Thank you, Madam Chair. I support alternative B. I came to the
meeting comfortable with the statement as written, but I have no objection to removing the
July 26–27, 2016
185 of 283
reference to residential investment. I don’t think it will generate excessive attention even if it is,
as Thomas said, a soft downgrade.
For this meeting, I believe it’s prudent to exercise patience and let the post-Brexit
economic picture, as well as the array of risks and uncertainties regarding the outlook, congeal. I
don’t think the Committee risks getting “behind the curve” by exercising patience at this
meeting. I think it’s appropriate to keep all options open for the September meeting. I can
foresee conditions that would be a reasonable basis for a discussion of a rate move at that
meeting.
In broad strokes, here is a configuration of the incoming data that would make me pretty
comfortable that the economy is on a track justifying serious consideration of a rate move. First,
second-quarter growth above 2 percent confirmed in official releases. We’ll get the first estimate
Friday and the second estimate on August 26. We’ll also have most of the data releases having
direct implications for revision in the third GDP estimate before the September meeting.
Second, apparent third-quarter growth consistent with that of the second quarter. We’ll have
almost all third-quarter GDP source data for July before the September meeting, but not much
source data for August. But we will have auto sales for August and, most important, retail sales
for August. Third, two more positive employment reports centered on payroll jobs gains
comfortably above the breakeven number needed to cover labor force growth. As a marker, I’m
thinking of 150,000 per month as being comfortably above that breakeven point. Finally,
continuing indications that inflation is firming and moving in the right direction. If a scenario
consistent with these conditions plays out through mid-September, as I said, I think the
Committee should give a rate increase serious consideration. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President George.
July 26–27, 2016
186 of 283
MS. GEORGE. Thank you, Madam Chair. I think Governor Tarullo’s comments
yesterday about challenging our views and assumptions and being open to changing one’s mind
is an important aspect of the job we do here. And, because I have found my own views outside
the consensus of the Committee from time to time, that kind of self-examination may come more
naturally for me. But I agree with him that it is an essential aspect of arriving at sound policy
prescriptions. In fact, I think it’s an obligation to the effective decisionmaking function of this
Committee, to the economic well-being of the public we serve, and with the assurance that
history will judge best whether our calibrations indeed achieve their aim. So, with that in mind, I
take a good dose of humility before these meetings, and, in that spirit, I’ll turn to my view on
today’s policy choices.
I support alternative C. Since our June meeting, job growth has been solid, GDP growth
looks to be back near trend, markets have calmed after a surprise Brexit vote, and inflation
outcomes are aligning with our statutory objectives. As a result, I see a 25 basis point increase
today as an appropriate adjustment to realized economic conditions, not necessarily a
commitment to a preset path to normal rates. Waiting longer to make adjustments is not a benign
choice, in my view. It challenges the clarity and the discipline of our monetary policy strategy,
and it leans in the direction of accepting risk. As deviations from policy rules become larger,
explaining the rationale for not adjusting rates becomes both more difficult and more important.
Continuing to appeal to headwinds—including events abroad, a subdued pace of household
formation, and low productivity growth—argues for further clarification. Household formation
and productivity growth are more supply-side factors, or at least structural factors, that monetary
policy is ill equipped to influence. Instead, insofar as these factors at least partially explain
July 26–27, 2016
187 of 283
declines in estimates for the longer-run terminal rate, it is the case that adjustments to the rate
need to occur sooner.
I am mindful of the fact that financial stability is an essential condition for achieving our
objectives for the economy. And I’m concerned that this extended period of negative real rates
can create incentives to “reach for yield” and can facilitate the misallocation of capital and the
mispricing of risk. But I do not believe raising rates should be a response to those realities. It is
too blunt a response, and the ability to both accurately identify these imbalances and time a
proper response has historically, both here and abroad, proved challenging.
I do worry about expectations of low rates for even longer becoming ingrained. I
recently heard anecdotes from bankers in our District that they have been anticipating higher
rates going back to 2011, when the Committee issued its first communication regarding
normalization principles, and have managed their balance sheets accordingly. Now they are
beginning to adjust those expectations, offering more longer-term fixed-rate loans with
assumptions that the unusually low rate environment will persist even longer. This seems likely
to be happening in other sectors even if our measures of financial stability aren’t yet registering
concern.
Finally, I do not view gradual adjustments to our policy stance as a function of judging
whether we are “behind the curve.” I’d prefer not to wait for that kind of evidence. Continuing
to wait to see more data could send a message that our attempts to achieve some degree of
normalization are failing or have become unnecessary. At our June meeting, there were
questions about whether we need to talk about normalization, and some expressed concern that
the goal seemed to be that normalizing the federal funds rate as a default view was risky. I think
the Committee should, in fact, take stock of our communications and its strategy in this regard.
July 26–27, 2016
188 of 283
Because the Committee outlined on several occasions since 2011 its intended path to policy
normalization and then raised the federal funds rate last December, the Committee’s credibility
will hinge on our ability to clarify that strategy. Although we’ve not talked about revisiting
those principles, I continue to think the reinvestment policy could offer an alternative or a
complement to how we think about future rate increases, especially in a world that continues to
demand safe assets.
And, finally, Madam Chair, on the language change, I can support dropping the reference
to residential investment. I think that, either way, some in the markets will note whether it’s
there or not there.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Powell.
MR. POWELL. Thank you, Madam Chair. With my baseline assumptions, I see the
appropriate path forward as one of gradual increases in the federal funds rate. For me, the
necessary conditions for further increases are, unsurprisingly, continued GDP growth at or above
potential, continued progress in the labor market, and inflation moving back to 2 percent over
time. I would like to see unemployment decline well below 5 percent, the current Tealbook
estimate of the natural rate, and I’d like to see, in that context, what happens to wages and to
labor force participation.
My baseline expectation is that those conditions will be fulfilled in the course of 2016. If
they are, I will support further rate increases, and I can see one or two this year—again, if those
conditions are fulfilled. But if one or more of the conditions are not fulfilled or if obvious global
risks emerge, in my view, it may be appropriate to pause. I don’t see the Committee as needing
to be in a hurry to raise rates. We have below-target inflation and an apparent weakening in both
demand and job creation. I do not feel a pressing need to take steps to slow the economy further.
July 26–27, 2016
189 of 283
It is plausible to me that those conditions will be fulfilled at the time of the September meeting.
Two strong payroll reports, combined with decent demand, could well suffice. The market is
currently pricing in a modest probability of an increase by the September meeting, and, in fact,
the market has been moving that probability up materially in response to incoming data. If the
two payroll reports are strong, then the market will likely move substantially in the direction of
an increase, and the rest of that gap could be closed through communication.
The question for today is whether to send a strong signal through the statement that an
increase is likely in September. I would not do that, because I actually don’t know whether a
rate increase in September is likely to be a good idea. We gave a strong signal earlier in the year
but were whipsawed by incoming data, and I’m reluctant to send a strong signal, as is contained
in alternative C, paragraph 3′. If the data do support a September increase, it will be
straightforward to bring markets into better alignment with that event. And if we send a strong
signal now but the data don’t cooperate, then I think we are in a position of climbing down again,
at real risk to the Committee’s credibility.
So I think we should continue to say clearly that the path of tightening is likely to be
gradual and dependent on the momentum of the economy, and we should let the data do the
talking. I support alternative B as written and am happy to accept the amendment on residential
investment. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. President Mester.
MS. MESTER. Thank you, Madam Chair. In view of my outlook and the risks, I believe
a gradual upward path of interest rates remains appropriate. We’ve made progress on both of our
monetary policy goals, and various forecasts and optimal control exercises indicate that, to
continue to make progress on our goals, it’s appropriate that we gradually increase the funds rate.
July 26–27, 2016
190 of 283
In my view, from the standpoint of what monetary policy can do, we have met our
maximum-employment goal. Employment growth is projected to be sufficient to lead to further
reductions in the unemployment rate and other measures of underutilization of labor. Both
anecdotal reports and data suggest wages are beginning to accelerate, although the pace of
acceleration is likely to be relatively slow as long as productivity growth remains low. I don’t
want to underestimate the problems many people continue to have in the labor market.
Technological advances and globalization are changing the nature of available jobs and the skill
sets needed to perform those jobs. I do believe that government policies and programs and
private–public partnerships should be brought to bear to help workers develop skills to reenter
and stay in the workforce. I just don’t see how monetary policy is a means to do that, and it
seems like a disservice to the very people it’s intended to help to suggest otherwise.
Although inflation remains below our 2 percent goal, we’ve made progress. I expect
inflation to move back gradually to our goal, consistent with my outlook that economic growth
will continue to be at or slightly above trend, that the unemployment rate will fall below
estimates of its longer-run trend, and that inflation expectations have been and will continue to
be reasonably stable. Of course, there will be some ups and downs along that path, depending on
the trajectory of oil prices and the dollar. But I think continued gradual progress is a reasonable
forecast.
I believe risks associated with the outlook have decreased since our June meeting in
terms of both those attending the labor market and the reaction to the U.K. referendum, which
have subsided. If financial stresses in the European banking system build up significantly in the
future, then we can address the implications for the U.S. economy at that time. I don’t think
holding policy rates low in the United States can mitigate that sort of risk or reduce the
July 26–27, 2016
191 of 283
probability that this type of event will occur. Indeed, by keeping rates lower for longer than
appropriate, we could be exacerbating problems in the banking system by encouraging even
greater search-for-yield behavior in light of lower net interest income.
Putting all of this together, I believe there’s a strong case for raising the funds rate. We
are not “behind the curve” yet, but if we continue to wait for every piece of data to line up before
we act, we will surely be “behind the curve.” And if we refrain from acting even though we are
making progress toward both of our policy goals, we’re going to confuse the public and reduce
our own credibility. At this point, I think we have the luxury of taking the next step and then
taking time to assess conditions before moving again. This is consistent with our anticipated
gradual path. It’s also consistent with our being data dependent in the right way. By that, I mean
it allows us to accumulate enough data so that we can better assess whether the medium-run
outlook has changed, rather than being “jerked around” by every monthly data release.
Assuming there’s no material change in the medium-run outlook between now and September,
whether we raise rates today or do it in September is immaterial from an economic standpoint.
In September we will have a new set of SEP numbers, the first estimate of second-quarter GDP,
two more job reports, and opportunities for further communication so that an action isn’t as
much of a surprise as one would be today.
Regarding today’s statement, in paragraph 1, I think the characterization of inflation
should acknowledge that inflation has risen this year, and that we’ve made progress on our
inflation goal. I prefer the inflation language in alternative C to that in alternative B. I prefer the
alternative language regarding residential investment that President Williams put on the table
today. I don’t think there’s been a material change in our housing outlook since June. If you
wanted to leave in a reference to residential investment, I suggest using language closer to what
July 26–27, 2016
192 of 283
we used in June and just simply say “Since the beginning of the year, the housing sector has
improved.” In paragraph 2, I believe it is very important that we indicate that near-term risks
have diminished, as now proposed in alternative B. I read the rest of the statement as not giving
any indication of what we will do in September. Regardless of market expectations, which may
remain low because of our own communications, if the outlook for the economy is largely
unchanged from what we see today, with employment growth continuing to be at or above the
estimates needed to put further downward pressure on the unemployment rate and the forecast
that inflation returns to our goal over time still intact, I will expect us to increase the funds rate in
September. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Governor Brainard.
MS. BRAINARD. Thank you, Madam Chair. I would want to get additional readings on
the underlying momentum of the economy before making a call on whether it’s appropriate to
adjust policy. In considering whether it will be appropriate to adjust policy in coming meetings,
it will be important to assess the distance to our policy goals, the speed at which we’re
approaching them, the balance of risks, and our ability to adjust course if the economy evolves
differently than we anticipate.
The recent pace of progress toward full employment appears to have downshifted
materially, and there are few, if any, signs of strong wage pressures. As payroll gains have
moderated, the unemployment rate has essentially moved sideways. Although there are some
indications that the economy is approaching full employment, estimates of full employment are
highly imprecise, and this has been exacerbated by the deep damage wrought by the Great
Recession. Moreover, some indicators, such as the prime-age employment-to-population ratio
and the number working part time for economic reasons, suggest there is still room to go.
July 26–27, 2016
193 of 283
Importantly, both headline and core inflation remain notably below 2 percent, and core inflation
has been below our target for 88 out of the past 92 months. To the extent that inflation
expectations show signs of becoming less well anchored, survey- and market-based measures
suggest we should be concerned about unanchoring not to the upside but to the downside.
If we were to suggest through our policy actions that we are content that the current level
of resource utilization is consistent with attainment of our dual mandate, our commitment to a
symmetric inflation target around 2 percent could be called into doubt, and inflation expectations
could suffer. While it seems likely that further improvement in economic momentum and
resource utilization will likely be necessary in order to reach our policy goals, more data will
help us assess just how much. In light of the recent slowing in economic momentum, with the
economy likely still somewhat short of reaching our goals, the downward tilt of risks to real
activity and inflation from abroad counsels a prudent approach.
We should carefully weigh the risks of moving to tighten policy prematurely against the
risks of moving too slowly. If we take a patient approach and policy does not adjust as rapidly as
it should and inflationary pressures build more quickly than we anticipate, we still have wellunderstood conventional tools and plenty of space to address this contingency. Moreover,
upwardly anchored expectations and weakness in external demand, along with what I believe is a
persistently lower neutral rate, will likely limit the steepness of that required policy response.
On the other hand, if we adjust policy in the hope that favorable data will subsequently
materialize and they do not, the economy will become more vulnerable to adverse shocks, even
fairly moderate ones. The space we have to address such a contingency using conventional tools
is extremely limited, and the policy options using nonconventional tools are not without
complications. As a result, we could risk a prolonged period in which inflation and, potentially,
July 26–27, 2016
194 of 283
employment fall short of our goals. In short, I would need to see some combination of greater
momentum in economic activity and progress on inflation before feeling confident that the
economy would both warrant a tightening in policy and remain resilient to possible negative
shocks from abroad that we discussed yesterday.
For those reasons, it’s important that the statement does not provide a soft commitment to
a policy adjustment in the near term, both to avoid muddying the waters on data dependence and
to avoid any risk to our credibility if we seem to change course subsequently. We’ll be receiving
important data before our next meeting: two employment reports, two reports on PCE inflation,
the first report on Q2 GDP, revisions to price, compensation, and spending data in previous
quarters, and important data on recent changes in labor compensation. We’ll also get a better
sense of the resilience of euro-area banks and insights about the shape of any possible response
by Italy. These will provide valuable insights about how much momentum has slowed, whether
it’s slowed, how quickly resource constraints are tightening, and how key risks are evolving.
The intermeeting data may indeed be consistent with a need for another step-up in the
federal funds rate in coming months, or, of course, they may not. In view of the uncertainty,
there’s a reasonable probability that the incoming data would not be consistent with a policy
adjustment in September. A soft lean in today’s statement would then be quite problematic
insofar as it might constrain our decisions in September. It would be better to leave
decisionmaking in September unconstrained. As Governor Powell suggested, if we see the data
coming in stronger, the market itself is likely to begin to adjust its expectations, and there’ll be
ample opportunity to communicate how the Committee is likely to react to those developments
through the minutes and the Chair’s communications.
July 26–27, 2016
195 of 283
Finally, I do have a suggestion in response to President Williams’s suggestion. If we do
decide to follow his recommendation to delete the reference to residential investment being soft,
it allows us to downgrade, I think, our description of business investment, which I would prefer
to see described as weak, reflecting that it has indeed been one of the troubling spots in the
economy for past quarters. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Vice Chairman.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Thank you, Madam Chair. I support alternative B. In
terms of language, when I think about paragraph 1, I think it is about us talking not about all of
the things that are happening in the U.S. economy, but talking about the things that are
happening in the U.S. economy that we think are important and that weigh on the outlook and
then, subsequently, weigh on our actions. If you use those criteria, it seems to me that the
reference to residential investment doesn’t really fit. We’re not really evaluating there was a lot
of signal in the recent softness in residential investment because we think it’s erratic and because
it’s following very strong residential investment in the first quarter. So I very much support
deleting that reference.
But with respect to the sentence “Job gains were strong in June following weak growth in
May,” I think those are important things that we want to stress, because we had quite a bit of
anxiety about the weakness in employment in May and we took quite a bit of solace from the
rebound in June. So, by that metric, I think we should be highlighting that. I agree with
President Williams that we don’t want to highlight monthly data a lot in paragraph 1, but when
it’s particularly important and when it really weighs on our evaluation of the economic data, I
think it’s appropriate.
July 26–27, 2016
196 of 283
There are two things I want to talk about more broadly. First, why are expectations about
U.S. short-term rates so far below what we actually expect to do over the next year to
18 months? Second, is that a problem, and, if so, what should we do about it?
When I look at the rate expectations out through 2018, I’m amazed at how flat the
interest rate curve is. I think there are a number of reasons to explain the shift, and that should
affect our view of how we think about this. First, people’s assessments of the neutral real shortterm rate have declined because economic growth has persistently fallen short of expectations. If
you look at the U.S. economy, it’s averaged only a 2.1 percent annual growth rate over the past
seven years, and, over the past year, it’s actually grown even weaker than that. So I think it’s
been much harder to sustain the view that the neutral real short-term rate is close to or will soon
be close to its historical level of around 2 percent. As I’ve said for a long time, I think we need
to reevaluate the efficacy of the Taylor-rule types of formulations.
The estimates of the current neutral real short-term rate obtained from many of the DSGE
models within the Federal Reserve System are quite interesting. Most of those estimates are
clustered close to zero, and that seems to me a much more reasonable estimate of what the
neutral short-term rate likely is at this time. If that’s right, it implies there’s only a small gap
between the actual real short-term rate of about minus 1 percent and the neutral real short-term
rate. So it implies that, while U.S. monetary policy is accommodative, it’s only mildly so. And I
think that also has implications for how fast we actually have to move in terms of raising shortterm interest rates.
In addition, as I discussed at the June meeting, I think many have come to the view that
this idea that the headwinds from the crisis that are depressing the neutral short-term rate are
going to dissipate in the near future may be becoming a less compelling story for the simple
July 26–27, 2016
197 of 283
reason that if the headwinds haven’t dissipated to a meaningful degree after seven years, what’s
going to happen in the next year or two that is going to, all of a sudden, necessarily cause them to
diminish? I think that some of the headwinds, at least, are going to prove to be much more
persistent. The one that I think is most noteworthy is the reduced availability of mortgage
financing for those with lower credit scores. That seems to me likely to linger for a long time,
because I think lenders now appreciate that home prices can decline significantly, and, thus, that
they can’t rely on the value of the housing collateral to secure their mortgage loans to the extent
they thought they could. So now the credit quality of the borrower really matters in terms of that
mortgage lending decision. I think this is something that’s just going to be with us for a very
long time.
A second reason for the downward adjustment in U.S. interest rate expectations is that
U.S. financial market conditions depend in part on the stance of our monetary policy relative to
monetary policies abroad. So if the economic outlook abroad deteriorates, that causes foreign
countries to pursue a more accommodative set of monetary policies, and that means we may also
have to adjust our own monetary policy path. If we don’t adjust our path, then the dollar would
likely appreciate because of higher relative U.S. interest rates, and this could result in an
undesired tightening in U.S. financial conditions. What we’ve seen is that the economic outlook
abroad has been disappointing, so the forward rate paths in Europe and Japan have fallen
considerably this year. If we had actually stayed on our December 2015 SEP path, then the U.S.
dollar would have likely appreciated much more significantly. So I think some of what we’re
seeing is, the U.S. rate path is coming down in tandem with the foreign interest rate path, and, as
a consequence of that, the dollar has appreciated only modestly.
July 26–27, 2016
198 of 283
The second question I wanted to talk about is whether this is a problem and, if so, what
we should do about it. I think the answer depends in large part on whether one judges that the
current set of financial conditions is too accommodative relative to what we need to achieve our
objectives. If we look at the various financial conditions indicators, financial conditions now
appear to be a bit easier than they were before our December decision to increase our federal
funds rate target. Although the dollar is slightly stronger, this has been more than offset by
lower long-term yields and higher equity prices. Now, this easing in financial conditions would
seem to argue for a rate hike, but, against this, the global outlook has deteriorated, and we
haven’t really upgraded our own forecast of economic growth or inflation. So, in other words,
one could also argue that it seems that we need a more accommodative set of financial conditions
in order to best achieve our objectives. I think that’s really what the argument is about. If it’s
true that we need an easier set of financial market conditions, then we probably should be
patient. So that’s really the tension here.
I’m really not sure which view is the right one. Because I don’t know which view is the
right one, I don’t want to foreshadow what we’re going to do in September until I can actually be
a little bit more certain about that outcome. If we do get closer to the September meeting and we
think we do want to move but market expectations are not there, I do think there are plenty of
opportunities to communicate in order to alter those expectations prior to that meeting. I don’t
see the need to do more at this meeting than what alternative B does. The near-term risks to the
outlook have diminished. I think it actually will push expectations about September upward. I
have no idea by how much. I would judge it’s probably a little rather than a lot, and one could
argue that somewhat different language could have a bigger effect. But I think that,
directionally, I’d be very surprised if expectations for September don’t move up a little bit with
July 26–27, 2016
199 of 283
that language, because people are going to look at it and say, “Despite the Brexit vote, which is a
negative, the Federal Reserve has decided that the near-term risks have diminished.” And I think
they’re going to take it to some extent as saying that the employment news and the favorable
market reaction following the Brexit vote trump the Brexit vote itself.
Finally, in terms of the language, as I said, I would favor deleting the “residential
investment” language and making no other changes to the statement. Thank you, Madam Chair.
CHAIR YELLEN. Thank you. Okay. Let me start with the smaller issues before
commenting on the larger ones. Why don’t we start with residential investment? I’ve heard
considerable support for changing the language there, and one possibility is simply to delete the
language about residential investment and to say nothing. I did hear President Mester suggest
that another possibility would simply be to say “Since the beginning of the year, the housing
sector has improved.” And, frankly, I’m open to either possibility. I suppose the simpler thing is
just to delete all reference to it. Would most of you be comfortable doing that—just deleting all
reference to it?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. I think there was a pretty strong consensus on that side.
CHAIR YELLEN. To just delete it completely?
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. Among the people who spoke, yes.
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay. So I suggest we delete it. The sentence would read
“Household spending has been growing strongly, but business fixed investment has been soft.”
The second suggestion of President Williams concerned the sentence “Job gains were
strong in June following weak growth in May.” I did hear a little bit of support for President
Williams’s proposal to delete that as well as some counterarguments. I’ll say that, for my own
part, normally I don’t like to focus on a lot of up-and-down in the data and prefer instead to focus
July 26–27, 2016
200 of 283
on longer-term trends, which are highlighted in the sentence that follows that. But I agree with
the Vice Chairman that, on this particular occasion, we strongly emphasized our concern about
the May reading. And to say that weak reading was completely reversed, essentially, in June is
giving a clear sense that we’re now discounting that and taking a stronger view. On this
occasion, I think it’s important, but if I hear a groundswell of sentiment for getting rid of it, I’m
open to it. President Kaplan.
MR. KAPLAN. The reason I agreed is, my fear is that we know that each of these
monthly data series is subject to revision, and sometimes it’s a large revision. As we go forward,
as we have volatility in monthly numbers, I don’t want the public to think our reaction function
is to overreact or underreact to any month. And I do think the sentence that follows does the
trick by focusing more on smoothing. I’m more worried about the public understanding our
reaction function, and, to me, citing individual months gives them a somewhat misleading
picture of our reaction function. That’s the reason I was in favor of deleting it.
CHAIR YELLEN. I guess, in general, I agree with that, and typically we do not cite
“This thing went up last month, and it fell.” When such things happen—and I guess residential
investment is arguably a case in point—we don’t talk about it, or we talk about longer-term
trends. So I think this is an unusual situation, but, to my mind, it’s one in which we focused so
much attention on our concern about the May employment report that it is a slightly different
situation. President Bullard.
MR. BULLARD. Thank you, Madam Chair. I think President Kaplan brings up a good
point about revisions. This could be changed in the future. And I also think it’s unnecessary.
The next sentence says “On balance, payrolls . . . ,” and everyone will know exactly what we’re
talking about without having to have the “upsey downsey” sentence in there. So I don’t think it
July 26–27, 2016
201 of 283
helps us, I don’t think it does anything for us, and the “On balance” sentence takes care of it. So
I would agree with President Williams on this.
CHAIR YELLEN. President Mester.
MS. MESTER. You know I’ve argued that we should take a longer-term view. My fear
is that if we don’t put this in, we’re not taking a stand that 287,000 jobs per month is strong job
growth. And I worry that if we take that out, people are going to think that an increase of
287,000 in jobs is kind of what we’re expecting each time.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. I think it would make the statement softer—
PRESIDENT ROSENGREN. To take it out.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. —to take it out, frankly. Because by highlighting the
job gains, what you’re doing is saying that you’re taking quite a bit of signal from it, which I
think we are.
PRESIDENT ROSENGREN. I agree with that.
CHAIR YELLEN. Absolutely. I agree. President Harker.
MR. HARKER. One possibility, without naming months, is just to delete that sentence,
get rid of “On balance,” and say “Job gains, payrolls, and other labor market indicators,”
et cetera. So it’s recognizing the job gains without actually explicitly naming the month.
VICE CHAIRMAN DUDLEY. We’re already saying that by the word “payrolls,”
though, aren’t we, President Harker?
MR. HARKER. I worry about naming the months, especially when you consider
revisions.
MR. FISCHER. I don’t think we should worry about naming this month. We had a
deviation of about three standard deviations from what was expected, and everybody noticed it,
July 26–27, 2016
202 of 283
and we used it as a reason why we weren’t raising rates—I don’t know quite how we phrased
it—so I think we should at least mention it.
CHAIR YELLEN. It was an important factor in our changing view, and this is
communicating that we’re now discounting what we said about our concerns at the June meeting.
Okay. I realize there are people on both sides of this. My suggestion is that we leave that as is,
and let me turn to the larger issue of September. I certainly heard many of you around the table
express the view that there is a strong case, in view of how the economy has behaved, for
moving rates gradually up over time; that September certainly should be on the table as an
option; and that you would want to see nothing in the statement or in our communications over
the next couple of months that would in any way tie our hands in September if we interpret that
the data are appropriate to move. Even among those of you who are more reluctant and skeptical
that a move in September will be appropriate and that the data will support it, I’ve also heard an
openness on your part to looking at the incoming data and evaluating whether a move in
September is appropriate, and I completely share that view.
I can easily imagine a data flow—President Lockhart set out some examples—that would
leave me feeling that we should move in September. I absolutely agree that it should be an open
option. We should do nothing to take September off the table. And as time passes and the data
flow comes in, if our sense is that September is appropriate, then our communication should help
markets to understand our evolving views.
Now, frankly, my interpretation of what’s in alternative B—I think both the changes in
paragraph 1 and the new red sentence in paragraph 2 do indicate that September is on the table,
and that it will be interpreted that way. I’m not perfect, either, at predicting market reaction to
our statements, but it is my sense that, for example, no changes at all are really expected in
July 26–27, 2016
203 of 283
paragraph 2 by most observers. And for us to say that near-term risks have diminished, I think,
will be noticed and taken as a signal not of any commitment to move, but as a sense that we’re
more comfortable with the data flow.
Many of you mentioned my speech at the Jackson Hole symposium. I have a good
opportunity there to comment on the incoming data flow. If we’re feeling that September looks
like the time we should move, first of all, I think the data flow will move markets. We’ve seen
that in the past. A number of you have commented on it. I would expect that. And I promise
that at Jackson Hole, if that looks appropriate, I will say something that will confirm that
sentiment or move it along.
I am very worried—a number of you have commented on this—that we have in the past
signaled we’re just on the verge of moving, and then something happens and we don’t move. I
do not regret our decisions in various meetings not to move. I think there were good reasons not
to move. But constantly suggesting we’re on the verge of moving and then not doing so is
harming our credibility. I would prefer to be more in a wait-and-see posture, in which every
meeting, particularly September, is “live,” and we will make our decision on the basis of the data
flow and not go too far.
And the language that’s in alternative C, I think, is true. You know, the case in favor of
raising the funds rate I believe has increased. I wouldn’t take any issue with the truthfulness of
that statement, but it would be taken as an extremely strong signal, and, to my mind, it’s not
appropriate at this point. I’ve heard a lot of sentiment in the direction of alternative C, but I also
have heard a large number of people who feel pretty strongly that alternative B is far enough for
today, so I would propose that we stick with the language in alternative B.
July 26–27, 2016
204 of 283
Let me say just one other thing before we call for a vote, and that is that both today and at
our June meeting I heard a number of you say that our statement and communications aren’t as
effective as they ought to be. In particular, over the past year, the pace of tightening has been
noticeably slower than we anticipated in December when we first raised rates. That’s led to the
cynical conclusion in some quarters that we’re always looking for an excuse, and we’ll always
find an excuse, not to raise rates. I’m wondering, in light of that, whether it’s helpful to keep
emphasizing in our statement that the funds rate is likely to rise gradually over the next two or
three years. And I think we do need to think hard about our forward guidance and whether we
could change the language so that it provides a somewhat better sense of what our actual reaction
function is and what it means when we say that our actions are data dependent. I think that in
coming meetings, this is something that we need to consider and discuss, and I will try to
structure some conversation on that. But for today, I would like to propose that we vote on
alternative B as written, with the one change pertaining to residential investment that we
discussed.
MR. MADIGAN. Thank you, Madam Chair. This vote will be on the statement
associated with alternative B, as on pages 6 and 7 of Thomas’s handout, with the change to the
fourth sentence that the Chair indicated. This vote will also cover the directive to the Desk as
included in the implementation note on page 10 of Thomas’s package.
Chair Yellen
Vice Chairman Dudley
Governor Brainard
President Bullard
Governor Fischer
President George
President Mester
Governor Powell
President Rosengren
Governor Tarullo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
July 26–27, 2016
205 of 283
MR. MADIGAN. Thank you.
CHAIR YELLEN. Okay. Thanks, everybody, for a good meeting. Our next meeting is
Tuesday and Wednesday, September 20 and 21. For those of you who will be around, there will
be a buffet lunch starting at 11:00.
END OF MEETING
Cite this document
APA
Federal Reserve (2016, July 26). FOMC Meeting Transcript. Fomc Transcripts, Federal Reserve. https://whenthefedspeaks.com/doc/fomc_transcript_20160727
BibTeX
@misc{wtfs_fomc_transcript_20160727,
author = {Federal Reserve},
title = {FOMC Meeting Transcript},
year = {2016},
month = {Jul},
howpublished = {Fomc Transcripts, Federal Reserve},
url = {https://whenthefedspeaks.com/doc/fomc_transcript_20160727},
note = {Retrieved via When the Fed Speaks corpus}
}